mirror of
https://github.com/guanzhi/GmSSL.git
synced 2026-08-09 15:33:58 +08:00
@@ -1,8 +1,14 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_name, SSL_CIPHER_get_bits, SSL_CIPHER_get_version, SSL_CIPHER_description - get SSL_CIPHER properties
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_cipher_nid, SSL_CIPHER_get_digest_nid, SSL_CIPHER_get_kx_nid,
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_auth_nid, SSL_CIPHER_is_aead,
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_name, SSL_CIPHER_get_bits,
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_version, SSL_CIPHER_description
|
||||
- get SSL_CIPHER properties
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,41 +18,58 @@ SSL_CIPHER_get_name, SSL_CIPHER_get_bits, SSL_CIPHER_get_version, SSL_CIPHER_des
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_get_bits(const SSL_CIPHER *cipher, int *alg_bits);
|
||||
char *SSL_CIPHER_get_version(const SSL_CIPHER *cipher);
|
||||
char *SSL_CIPHER_description(const SSL_CIPHER *cipher, char *buf, int size);
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_get_cipher_nid(const SSL_CIPHER *c);
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_get_digest_nid(const SSL_CIPHER *c);
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_get_kx_nid(const SSL_CIPHER *c);
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_get_auth_nid(const SSL_CIPHER *c);
|
||||
int SSL_CIPHER_is_aead(const SSL_CIPHER *c);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_name() returns a pointer to the name of B<cipher>. If the
|
||||
argument is the NULL pointer, a pointer to the constant value "NONE" is
|
||||
returned.
|
||||
B<cipher> is NULL, it returns "(NONE)".
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_bits() returns the number of secret bits used for B<cipher>. If
|
||||
B<alg_bits> is not NULL, it contains the number of bits processed by the
|
||||
chosen algorithm. If B<cipher> is NULL, 0 is returned.
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_bits() returns the number of secret bits used for B<cipher>.
|
||||
If B<cipher> is NULL, 0 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_version() returns string which indicates the SSL/TLS protocol
|
||||
version that first defined the cipher.
|
||||
This is currently B<SSLv2> or B<TLSv1/SSLv3>.
|
||||
In some cases it should possibly return "TLSv1.2" but does not;
|
||||
use SSL_CIPHER_description() instead.
|
||||
If B<cipher> is NULL, "(NONE)" is returned.
|
||||
version that first defined the cipher. It returns "(NONE)" if B<cipher> is NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_cipher_nid() returns the cipher NID corresponding to B<c>.
|
||||
If there is no cipher (e.g. for ciphersuites with no encryption) then
|
||||
B<NID_undef> is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_digest_nid() returns the digest NID corresponding to the MAC
|
||||
used by B<c>. If there is no digest (e.g. for AEAD ciphersuites) then
|
||||
B<NID_undef> is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_kx_nid() returns the key exchange NID corresponding to the method
|
||||
used by B<c>. If there is no key exchange, then B<NID_undef> is returned. Examples (not comprehensive):
|
||||
|
||||
NID_kx_rsa
|
||||
NID_kx_ecdhe
|
||||
NID_kx_dhe
|
||||
NID_kx_psk
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_auth_nid() returns the authentication NID corresponding to the method
|
||||
used by B<c>. If there is no authentication, then B<NID_undef> is returned.
|
||||
Examples (not comprehensive):
|
||||
|
||||
NID_auth_rsa
|
||||
NID_auth_ecdsa
|
||||
NID_auth_psk
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_is_aead() returns 1 if the cipher B<c> is AEAD (e.g. GCM or
|
||||
ChaCha20/Poly1305), and 0 if it is not AEAD.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_description() returns a textual description of the cipher used
|
||||
into the buffer B<buf> of length B<len> provided. B<len> must be at least
|
||||
128 bytes, otherwise a pointer to the string "Buffer too small" is
|
||||
returned. If B<buf> is NULL, a buffer of 128 bytes is allocated using
|
||||
OPENSSL_malloc(). If the allocation fails, a pointer to the string
|
||||
"OPENSSL_malloc Error" is returned.
|
||||
into the buffer B<buf> of length B<len> provided. If B<buf> is provided, it
|
||||
must be at least 128 bytes, otherwise a buffer will be allocated using
|
||||
OPENSSL_malloc(). If the provided buffer is too small, or the allocation fails,
|
||||
B<NULL> is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The number of bits processed can be different from the secret bits. An
|
||||
export cipher like e.g. EXP-RC4-MD5 has only 40 secret bits. The algorithm
|
||||
does use the full 128 bits (which would be returned for B<alg_bits>), of
|
||||
which however 88bits are fixed. The search space is hence only 40 bits.
|
||||
|
||||
The string returned by SSL_CIPHER_description() in case of success consists
|
||||
of cleartext information separated by one or more blanks in the following
|
||||
sequence:
|
||||
The string returned by SSL_CIPHER_description() consists of several fields
|
||||
separated by whitespace:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -56,77 +79,52 @@ Textual representation of the cipher name.
|
||||
|
||||
=item <protocol version>
|
||||
|
||||
Protocol version: B<SSLv2>, B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1.2>. The TLSv1.0 ciphers are
|
||||
flagged with SSLv3. No new ciphers were added by TLSv1.1.
|
||||
Protocol version, such as B<TLSv1.2>, when the cipher was first defined.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Kx=<key exchange>
|
||||
|
||||
Key exchange method: B<RSA> (for export ciphers as B<RSA(512)> or
|
||||
B<RSA(1024)>), B<DH> (for export ciphers as B<DH(512)> or B<DH(1024)>),
|
||||
B<DH/RSA>, B<DH/DSS>, B<Fortezza>.
|
||||
Key exchange method such as B<RSA>, B<ECDHE>, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Au=<authentication>
|
||||
|
||||
Authentication method: B<RSA>, B<DSS>, B<DH>, B<None>. None is the
|
||||
Authentication method such as B<RSA>, B<None>, etc.. None is the
|
||||
representation of anonymous ciphers.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Enc=<symmetric encryption method>
|
||||
|
||||
Encryption method with number of secret bits: B<DES(40)>, B<DES(56)>,
|
||||
B<3DES(168)>, B<RC4(40)>, B<RC4(56)>, B<RC4(64)>, B<RC4(128)>,
|
||||
B<RC2(40)>, B<RC2(56)>, B<RC2(128)>, B<IDEA(128)>, B<Fortezza>, B<None>.
|
||||
Encryption method, with number of secret bits, such as B<AESGCM(128)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Mac=<message authentication code>
|
||||
|
||||
Message digest: B<MD5>, B<SHA1>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item <export flag>
|
||||
|
||||
If the cipher is flagged exportable with respect to old US crypto
|
||||
regulations, the word "B<export>" is printed.
|
||||
Message digest, such as B<SHA256>.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
Some examples for the output of SSL_CIPHER_description():
|
||||
|
||||
EDH-RSA-DES-CBC3-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=RSA Enc=3DES(168) Mac=SHA1
|
||||
EDH-DSS-DES-CBC3-SHA SSLv3 Kx=DH Au=DSS Enc=3DES(168) Mac=SHA1
|
||||
RC4-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA Au=RSA Enc=RC4(128) Mac=MD5
|
||||
EXP-RC4-MD5 SSLv3 Kx=RSA(512) Au=RSA Enc=RC4(40) Mac=MD5 export
|
||||
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA256 TLSv1.2 Kx=ECDH Au=RSA Enc=AESGCM(256) Mac=AEAD
|
||||
RSA-PSK-AES256-CBC-SHA384 TLSv1.0 Kx=RSAPSK Au=RSA Enc=AES(256) Mac=SHA384
|
||||
|
||||
A comp[lete list can be retrieved by invoking the following command:
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
openssl ciphers -v ALL
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_version() was updated to always return the correct protocol
|
||||
string in OpenSSL 1.1.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
If SSL_CIPHER_description() is called with B<cipher> being NULL, the
|
||||
library crashes.
|
||||
|
||||
If SSL_CIPHER_description() cannot handle a built-in cipher, the according
|
||||
description of the cipher property is B<unknown>. This case should not
|
||||
occur.
|
||||
|
||||
The standard terminology for ephemeral Diffie-Hellman schemes is DHE
|
||||
(finite field) or ECDHE (elliptic curve). This version of OpenSSL
|
||||
idiosyncratically reports these schemes as EDH and EECDH, even though
|
||||
it also accepts the standard terminology.
|
||||
|
||||
It is recommended to use the standard terminology (DHE and ECDHE)
|
||||
during configuration (e.g. via SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list) for clarity of
|
||||
configuration. OpenSSL versions after 1.0.2 will report the standard
|
||||
terms via SSL_CIPHER_get_name and SSL_CIPHER_description.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
See DESCRIPTION
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_description() was changed to return B<NULL> on error,
|
||||
rather than a fixed string, in OpenSSL 1.1
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_current_cipher(3)|SSL_get_current_cipher(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ciphers(3)|SSL_get_ciphers(3)>, L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_current_cipher(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ciphers(3)>, L<ciphers(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,16 +1,27 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_add_compression_method, SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods - handle SSL/TLS integrated compression methods
|
||||
SSL_COMP_add_compression_method, SSL_COMP_get_compression_methods,
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get0_name, SSL_COMP_get_id, SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods
|
||||
- handle SSL/TLS integrated compression methods
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_COMP_add_compression_method(int id, COMP_METHOD *cm);
|
||||
STACK_OF(SSL_COMP) *SSL_COMP_get_compression_methods(void);
|
||||
const char *SSL_COMP_get0_name(const SSL_COMP *comp);
|
||||
int SSL_COMP_get_id(const SSL_COMP *comp);
|
||||
|
||||
+void SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods(void);
|
||||
Deprecated:
|
||||
|
||||
#if OPENSSL_API_COMPAT < 0x10100000L
|
||||
void SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods(void)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,9 +30,19 @@ the identifier B<id> to the list of available compression methods. This
|
||||
list is globally maintained for all SSL operations within this application.
|
||||
It cannot be set for specific SSL_CTX or SSL objects.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods() frees the internal table of
|
||||
compression methods that were built internally, and possibly
|
||||
augmented by adding SSL_COMP_add_compression_method().
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get_compression_methods() returns a stack of all of the available
|
||||
compression methods or NULL on error.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get0_name() returns the name of the compression method B<comp>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get_id() returns the id of the compression method B<comp>.
|
||||
|
||||
In versions of OpenSSL prior to 1.1.0 SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods() freed
|
||||
the internal table of compression methods that were built internally, and
|
||||
possibly augmented by adding SSL_COMP_add_compression_method(). However this is
|
||||
now unnecessary from version 1.1.0. No explicit initialisation or
|
||||
de-initialisation is necessary. See L<OPENSSL_init_crypto(3)> and
|
||||
L<OPENSSL_init_ssl(3)>. From OpenSSL 1.1.0 calling this function does nothing.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -69,8 +90,29 @@ The operation failed. Check the error queue to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get_compression_methods() returns the stack of compressions methods or
|
||||
NULL on error.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get0_name() returns the name of the compression method or NULL on error.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get_id() returns the name of the compression method or -1 on error.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_COMP_free_compression_methods() was deprecated in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
SSL_COMP_get0_name() and SSL_comp_get_id() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0d.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_CTX_new, SSL_CONF_CTX_free - SSL configuration allocation functions
|
||||
@@ -17,6 +19,7 @@ The function SSL_CONF_CTX_new() allocates and initialises an B<SSL_CONF_CTX>
|
||||
structure for use with the SSL_CONF functions.
|
||||
|
||||
The function SSL_CONF_CTX_free() frees up the context B<cctx>.
|
||||
If B<cctx> is NULL nothing is done.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,14 +30,23 @@ SSL_CONF_CTX_free() does not return a value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix - Set configuration context command prefix
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ to B<prefix>. If B<prefix> is B<NULL> it is restored to the default value.
|
||||
Command prefixes alter the commands recognised by subsequent SSL_CTX_cmd()
|
||||
calls. For example for files, if the prefix "SSL" is set then command names
|
||||
such as "SSLProtocol", "SSLOptions" etc. are recognised instead of "Protocol"
|
||||
and "Options". Similarly for command lines if the prefix is "--ssl-" then
|
||||
and "Options". Similarly for command lines if the prefix is "--ssl-" then
|
||||
"--ssl-no_tls1_2" is recognised instead of "-no_tls1_2".
|
||||
|
||||
If the B<SSL_CONF_FLAG_CMDLINE> flag is set then prefix checks are case
|
||||
@@ -36,14 +38,23 @@ SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags, SSL_CONF_CTX_clear_flags - Set of clear SSL configuration context flags
|
||||
@@ -40,6 +42,13 @@ both of these flags must be set.
|
||||
|
||||
recognise certificate and private key options.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_CONF_FLAG_REQUIRE_PRIVATE
|
||||
|
||||
If this option is set then if a private key is not specified for a certificate
|
||||
it will attempt to load a private key from the certificate file when
|
||||
SSL_CONF_CTX_finish() is called. If a key cannot be loaded from the certificate
|
||||
file an error occurs.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_CONF_FLAG_SHOW_ERRORS
|
||||
|
||||
indicate errors relating to unrecognised options or missing arguments in
|
||||
@@ -55,14 +64,23 @@ value after setting or clearing flags.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx, SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl - set context to configure
|
||||
@@ -34,14 +36,23 @@ SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx() and SSL_CTX_set_ssl() do not return a value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd_value_type, SSL_CONF_finish,
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd - send configuration command
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
@@ -101,7 +104,7 @@ are permitted.
|
||||
Attempts to use the file B<value> as the private key for the appropriate
|
||||
context. This option is only supported if certificate operations
|
||||
are permitted. Note: if no B<-key> option is set then a private key is
|
||||
not loaded: it does not currently use the B<-cert> file.
|
||||
not loaded unless the flag B<SSL_CONF_FLAG_REQUIRE_PRIVATE> is set.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-dhparam>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -109,19 +112,40 @@ Attempts to use the file B<value> as the set of temporary DH parameters for
|
||||
the appropriate context. This option is only supported if certificate
|
||||
operations are permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-no_ssl2>, B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1>, B<-no_tls1_1>, B<-no_tls1_2>
|
||||
=item B<-min_protocol>, B<-max_protocol>
|
||||
|
||||
Disables protocol support for SSLv2, SSLv3, TLSv1.0, TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2
|
||||
by setting the corresponding options B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2>, B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3>,
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1> and B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2> respectively.
|
||||
Sets the minimum and maximum supported protocol.
|
||||
Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>,
|
||||
B<TLSv1.1>, B<TLSv1.2> for TLS and B<DTLSv1>, B<DTLSv1.2> for DTLS,
|
||||
and B<None> for no limit.
|
||||
If the either bound is not specified then only the other bound applies,
|
||||
if specified.
|
||||
To restrict the supported protocol versions use these commands rather
|
||||
than the deprecated alternative commands below.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-no_ssl3>, B<-no_tls1>, B<-no_tls1_1>, B<-no_tls1_2>
|
||||
|
||||
Disables protocol support for SSLv3, TLSv1.0, TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2 by setting the
|
||||
corresponding options B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1>
|
||||
and B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2> respectively.
|
||||
These options are deprecated, instead use B<-min_protocol> and B<-max_protocol>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-bugs>
|
||||
|
||||
Various bug workarounds are set, same as setting B<SSL_OP_ALL>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-comp>
|
||||
|
||||
Enables support for SSL/TLS compression, same as clearing
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_COMPRESSION>.
|
||||
This command was introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 1.1.0, compression is off by default.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-no_comp>
|
||||
|
||||
Disables support for SSL/TLS compression, same as setting B<SSL_OP_NO_COMPRESS>.
|
||||
Disables support for SSL/TLS compression, same as setting
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_COMPRESSION>.
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 1.1.0, compression is off by default.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-no_ticket>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -153,20 +177,13 @@ Set by default.
|
||||
enables strict mode protocol handling. Equivalent to setting
|
||||
B<SSL_CERT_FLAG_TLS_STRICT>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<-debug_broken_protocol>
|
||||
|
||||
disables various checks and permits several kinds of broken protocol behaviour
|
||||
for testing purposes: it should B<NEVER> be used in anything other than a test
|
||||
environment. Only supported if OpenSSL is configured with
|
||||
B<-DOPENSSL_SSL_DEBUG_BROKEN_PROTOCOL>.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SUPPORTED CONFIGURATION FILE COMMANDS
|
||||
|
||||
Currently supported B<cmd> names for configuration files (i.e. when the
|
||||
flag B<SSL_CONF_FLAG_FILE> is set) are listed below. All configuration file
|
||||
B<cmd> names and are case insensitive so B<signaturealgorithms> is recognised
|
||||
B<cmd> names are case insensitive so B<signaturealgorithms> is recognised
|
||||
as well as B<SignatureAlgorithms>. Unless otherwise stated the B<value> names
|
||||
are also case insensitive.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -192,8 +209,14 @@ are permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
Attempts to use the file B<value> as the private key for the appropriate
|
||||
context. This option is only supported if certificate operations
|
||||
are permitted. Note: if no B<-key> option is set then a private key is
|
||||
not loaded: it does not currently use the B<Certificate> file.
|
||||
are permitted. Note: if no B<PrivateKey> option is set then a private key is
|
||||
not loaded unless the B<SSL_CONF_FLAG_REQUIRE_PRIVATE> is set.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<ChainCAFile>, B<ChainCAPath>, B<VerifyCAFile>, B<VerifyCAPath>
|
||||
|
||||
These options indicate a file or directory used for building certificate
|
||||
chains or verifying certificate chains. These options are only supported
|
||||
if certificate operations are permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<ServerInfoFile>
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -242,33 +265,57 @@ The B<value> argument is a colon separated list of curves. The curve can be
|
||||
either the B<NIST> name (e.g. B<P-256>) or an OpenSSL OID name (e.g
|
||||
B<prime256v1>). Curve names are case sensitive.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<ECDHParameters>
|
||||
=item B<MinProtocol>
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the temporary curve used for ephemeral ECDH modes. Only used by
|
||||
servers
|
||||
This sets the minimum supported SSL, TLS or DTLS version.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<value> argument is a curve name or the special value B<Automatic> which
|
||||
picks an appropriate curve based on client and server preferences. The curve
|
||||
can be either the B<NIST> name (e.g. B<P-256>) or an OpenSSL OID name
|
||||
(e.g B<prime256v1>). Curve names are case sensitive.
|
||||
Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
|
||||
B<TLSv1.2>, B<DTLSv1> and B<DTLSv1.2>.
|
||||
The value B<None> will disable the limit.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<MaxProtocol>
|
||||
|
||||
This sets the maximum supported SSL, TLS or DTLS version.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
|
||||
B<TLSv1.2>, B<DTLSv1> and B<DTLSv1.2>.
|
||||
The value B<None> will disable the limit.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<Protocol>
|
||||
|
||||
The supported versions of the SSL or TLS protocol.
|
||||
This can be used to enable or disable certain versions of the SSL,
|
||||
TLS or DTLS protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<value> argument is a comma separated list of supported protocols to
|
||||
enable or disable. If an protocol is preceded by B<-> that version is disabled.
|
||||
Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv2>, B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>,
|
||||
B<TLSv1.1> and B<TLSv1.2>.
|
||||
All protocol versions other than B<SSLv2> are enabled by default.
|
||||
To avoid inadvertent enabling of B<SSLv2>, when SSLv2 is disabled, it is not
|
||||
possible to enable it via the B<Protocol> command.
|
||||
The B<value> argument is a comma separated list of supported protocols
|
||||
to enable or disable.
|
||||
If a protocol is preceded by B<-> that version is disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
All protocol versions are enabled by default.
|
||||
You need to disable at least one protocol version for this setting have any
|
||||
effect.
|
||||
Only enabling some protocol versions does not disable the other protocol
|
||||
versions.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently supported protocol values are B<SSLv3>, B<TLSv1>, B<TLSv1.1>,
|
||||
B<TLSv1.2>, B<DTLSv1> and B<DTLSv1.2>.
|
||||
The special value B<ALL> refers to all supported versions.
|
||||
|
||||
This can't enable protocols that are disabled using B<MinProtocol>
|
||||
or B<MaxProtocol>, but can disable protocols that are still allowed
|
||||
by them.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<Protocol> command is fragile and deprecated; do not use it.
|
||||
Use B<MinProtocol> and B<MaxProtocol> instead.
|
||||
If you do use B<Protocol>, make sure that the resulting range of enabled
|
||||
protocols has no "holes", e.g. if TLS 1.0 and TLS 1.2 are both enabled, make
|
||||
sure to also leave TLS 1.1 enabled.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<Options>
|
||||
|
||||
The B<value> argument is a comma separated list of various flags to set.
|
||||
If a flag string is preceded B<-> it is disabled. See the
|
||||
B<SSL_CTX_set_options> function for more details of individual options.
|
||||
If a flag string is preceded B<-> it is disabled.
|
||||
See the L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)> function for more details of
|
||||
individual options.
|
||||
|
||||
Each option is listed below. Where an operation is enabled by default
|
||||
the B<-flag> syntax is needed to disable it.
|
||||
@@ -307,6 +354,27 @@ B<UnsafeLegacyServerConnect> permits the use of unsafe legacy renegotiation
|
||||
for OpenSSL clients only. Equivalent to B<SSL_OP_LEGACY_SERVER_CONNECT>.
|
||||
Set by default.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<VerifyMode>
|
||||
|
||||
The B<value> argument is a comma separated list of flags to set.
|
||||
|
||||
B<Peer> enables peer verification: for clients only.
|
||||
|
||||
B<Request> requests but does not require a certificate from the client.
|
||||
Servers only.
|
||||
|
||||
B<Require> requests and requires a certificate from the client: an error
|
||||
occurs if the client does not present a certificate. Servers only.
|
||||
|
||||
B<Once> requests a certificate from a client only on the initial connection:
|
||||
not when renegotiating. Servers only.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<ClientCAFile>, B<ClientCAPath>
|
||||
|
||||
A file or directory of certificates in PEM format whose names are used as the
|
||||
set of acceptable names for client CAs. Servers only. This option is only
|
||||
supported if certificate operations are permitted.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SUPPORTED COMMAND TYPES
|
||||
@@ -333,6 +401,11 @@ The value is a file name.
|
||||
|
||||
The value is a directory name.
|
||||
|
||||
=item B<SSL_CONF_TYPE_NONE>
|
||||
|
||||
The value string is not used e.g. a command line option which doesn't take an
|
||||
argument.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
@@ -349,7 +422,7 @@ however the call sequence is:
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, userparam, uservalue);
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Protocol", "-SSLv3");
|
||||
|
||||
then SSLv3 is B<always> disabled and attempt to override this by the user are
|
||||
SSLv3 is B<always> disabled and attempt to override this by the user are
|
||||
ignored.
|
||||
|
||||
By checking the return code of SSL_CTX_cmd() it is possible to query if a
|
||||
@@ -385,18 +458,42 @@ Set supported signature algorithms:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "SignatureAlgorithms", "ECDSA+SHA256:RSA+SHA256:DSA+SHA256");
|
||||
|
||||
Enable all protocols except SSLv3 and SSLv2:
|
||||
There are various ways to select the supported protocols.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Protocol", "ALL,-SSLv3,-SSLv2");
|
||||
This set the minimum protocol version to TLSv1, and so disables SSLv3.
|
||||
This is the recommended way to disable protocols.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "MinProtocol", "TLSv1");
|
||||
|
||||
The following also disables SSLv3:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Protocol", "-SSLv3");
|
||||
|
||||
The following will first enable all protocols, and then disable
|
||||
SSLv3.
|
||||
If no protocol versions were disabled before this has the same effect as
|
||||
"-SSLv3", but if some versions were disables this will re-enable them before
|
||||
disabling SSLv3.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Protocol", "ALL,-SSLv3");
|
||||
|
||||
Only enable TLSv1.2:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "MinProtocol", "TLSv1.2");
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "MaxProtocol", "TLSv1.2");
|
||||
|
||||
This also only enables TLSv1.2:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Protocol", "-ALL,TLSv1.2");
|
||||
|
||||
Disable TLS session tickets:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Options", "-SessionTicket");
|
||||
|
||||
Enable compression:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Options", "Compression");
|
||||
|
||||
Set supported curves to P-256, P-384:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd(ctx, "Curves", "P-256:P-384");
|
||||
@@ -426,14 +523,33 @@ SSL_CONF_finish() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd_argv(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd() was first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_SSL2> doesn't have effect since 1.1.0, but the macro is retained
|
||||
for backwards compatibility.
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_CONF_TYPE_NONE> was first added to OpenSSL 1.1.0. In earlier versions of
|
||||
OpenSSL passing a command which didn't take an argument would return
|
||||
B<SSL_CONF_TYPE_UNKNOWN>.
|
||||
|
||||
B<MinProtocol> and B<MaxProtocol> where added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd_argv - SSL configuration command line processing.
|
||||
SSL_CONF_cmd_argv - SSL configuration command line processing
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,14 +31,23 @@ to an error: for example a syntax error in the argument.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)|SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)|SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_flags(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set1_prefix(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_CTX_set_ssl_ctx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CONF_cmd(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2012-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set0_chain, SSL_CTX_set1_chain, SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert,
|
||||
@@ -138,13 +140,21 @@ a verification error occurs then 2 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
All other functions return 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2013-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert, SSL_CTX_clear_extra_chain_certs - add or clear
|
||||
@@ -30,7 +32,7 @@ following the end entity certificate.
|
||||
|
||||
If no chain is specified, the library will try to complete the chain from the
|
||||
available CA certificates in the trusted CA storage, see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<x509> certificate provided to SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert() will be
|
||||
freed by the library when the B<SSL_CTX> is destroyed. An application
|
||||
@@ -53,19 +55,28 @@ reason for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set0_chain(3)|SSL_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set1_chain(3)|SSL_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)|SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_build_cert_chain(3)|SSL_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_session, SSL_add_session, SSL_CTX_remove_session, SSL_remove_session - manipulate session cache
|
||||
@@ -19,10 +21,10 @@ SSL_CTX_add_session, SSL_add_session, SSL_CTX_remove_session, SSL_remove_session
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_session() adds the session B<c> to the context B<ctx>. The
|
||||
reference count for session B<c> is incremented by 1. If a session with
|
||||
the same session id already exists, the old session is removed by calling
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_remove_session() removes the session B<c> from the context B<ctx>.
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)> is called once for B<c>.
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)> is called once for B<c>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_add_session() and SSL_remove_session() are synonyms for their
|
||||
SSL_CTX_*() counterparts.
|
||||
@@ -59,15 +61,24 @@ The following values are returned by all functions:
|
||||
session was not found in the cache.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<>1
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_ctrl, SSL_CTX_callback_ctrl, SSL_ctrl, SSL_callback_ctrl - internal handling functions for SSL_CTX and SSL objects
|
||||
@@ -29,6 +31,15 @@ supplied via the B<cmd> parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_flush_sessions, SSL_flush_sessions - remove expired sessions
|
||||
@@ -25,8 +27,8 @@ up to the specified maximum number (see SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size()).
|
||||
As sessions will not be reused ones they are expired, they should be
|
||||
removed from the cache to save resources. This can either be done
|
||||
automatically whenever 255 new sessions were established (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>)
|
||||
or manually by calling SSL_CTX_flush_sessions().
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>)
|
||||
or manually by calling SSL_CTX_flush_sessions().
|
||||
|
||||
The parameter B<tm> specifies the time which should be used for the
|
||||
expiration test, in most cases the actual time given by time(0)
|
||||
@@ -35,15 +37,22 @@ will be used.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_flush_sessions() will only check sessions stored in the internal
|
||||
cache. When a session is found and removed, the remove_session_cb is however
|
||||
called to synchronize with the external cache (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)|SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_free - free an allocated SSL_CTX object
|
||||
@@ -13,13 +15,14 @@ SSL_CTX_free - free an allocated SSL_CTX object
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_free() decrements the reference count of B<ctx>, and removes the
|
||||
SSL_CTX object pointed to by B<ctx> and frees up the allocated memory if the
|
||||
the reference count has reached 0.
|
||||
SSL_CTX object pointed to by B<ctx> and frees up the allocated memory if the reference count has reached 0.
|
||||
|
||||
It also calls the free()ing procedures for indirectly affected items, if
|
||||
applicable: the session cache, the list of ciphers, the list of Client CAs,
|
||||
the certificates and keys.
|
||||
|
||||
If B<ctx> is NULL nothing is done.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNINGS
|
||||
|
||||
If a session-remove callback is set (SSL_CTX_sess_set_remove_cb()), this
|
||||
@@ -35,7 +38,16 @@ SSL_CTX_free() does not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>, L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get0_param, SSL_get0_param, SSL_CTX_set1_param, SSL_set1_param -
|
||||
@@ -46,10 +48,19 @@ for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags(3)|X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags(3)>
|
||||
L<X509_VERIFY_PARAM_set_flags(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_ex_new_index, SSL_CTX_set_ex_data, SSL_CTX_get_ex_data - internal application specific data functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_get_ex_new_index(long argl, void *argp,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_new *new_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_dup *dup_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_free *free_func);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_ex_data(SSL_CTX *ctx, int idx, void *arg);
|
||||
|
||||
void *SSL_CTX_get_ex_data(const SSL_CTX *ctx, int idx);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef int new_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef void free_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef int dup_func(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *to, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *from, void *from_d,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Several OpenSSL structures can have application specific data attached to them.
|
||||
These functions are used internally by OpenSSL to manipulate application
|
||||
specific data attached to a specific structure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_ex_new_index() is used to register a new index for application
|
||||
specific data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ex_data() is used to store application data at B<arg> for B<idx>
|
||||
into the B<ctx> object.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_ex_data() is used to retrieve the information for B<idx> from
|
||||
B<ctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
A detailed description for the B<*_get_ex_new_index()> functionality
|
||||
can be found in L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>.
|
||||
The B<*_get_ex_data()> and B<*_set_ex_data()> functionality is described in
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>,
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode, SSL_get_verify_mode, SSL_CTX_get_verify_depth, SSL_get_verify_depth, SSL_get_verify_callback, SSL_CTX_get_verify_callback - get currently set verification parameters
|
||||
@@ -45,6 +47,15 @@ See DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations - set default locations for trusted CA
|
||||
certificates
|
||||
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations, SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_dir, SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_file - set
|
||||
default locations for trusted CA certificates
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,12 +15,34 @@ certificates
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(SSL_CTX *ctx, const char *CAfile,
|
||||
const char *CApath);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_dir(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_file(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations() specifies the locations for B<ctx>, at
|
||||
which CA certificates for verification purposes are located. The certificates
|
||||
available via B<CAfile> and B<CApath> are trusted.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths() specifies that the default locations from
|
||||
which CA certificates are loaded should be used. There is one default directory
|
||||
and one default file. The default CA certificates directory is called "certs" in
|
||||
the default OpenSSL directory. Alternatively the SSL_CERT_DIR environment
|
||||
variable can be defined to override this location. The default CA certificates
|
||||
file is called "cert.pem" in the default OpenSSL directory. Alternatively the
|
||||
SSL_CERT_FILE environment variable can be defined to override this location.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_dir() is similar to
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths() except that just the default directory is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_file() is similar to
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths() except that just the default file is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
If B<CAfile> is not NULL, it points to a file of CA certificates in PEM
|
||||
@@ -59,14 +84,14 @@ In server mode, when requesting a client certificate, the server must send
|
||||
the list of CAs of which it will accept client certificates. This list
|
||||
is not influenced by the contents of B<CAfile> or B<CApath> and must
|
||||
explicitly be set using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>
|
||||
family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
When building its own certificate chain, an OpenSSL client/server will
|
||||
try to fill in missing certificates from B<CAfile>/B<CApath>, if the
|
||||
certificate chain was not explicitly specified (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNINGS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -96,7 +121,7 @@ for use as B<CApath>:
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
The following return values can occur:
|
||||
For SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations the following return values can occur:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -112,13 +137,27 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_paths(), SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_dir() and
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_verify_file() all return 1 on success or 0 on failure. A
|
||||
missing default location is still treated as a success.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_store(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cert_store(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_store(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,139 +1,134 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_new,
|
||||
SSLv23_method, SSLv23_server_method, SSLv23_client_method,
|
||||
TLSv1_2_method, TLSv1_2_server_method, TLSv1_2_client_method,
|
||||
TLSv1_1_method, TLSv1_1_server_method, TLSv1_1_client_method,
|
||||
TLSv1_method, TLSv1_server_method, TLSv1_client_method,
|
||||
SSLv3_method, SSLv3_server_method, SSLv3_client_method,
|
||||
SSLv2_method, SSLv2_server_method, SSLv2_client_method,
|
||||
DTLS_method, DTLS_server_method, DTLS_client_method,
|
||||
DTLSv1_2_method, DTLSv1_2_server_method, DTLSv1_2_client_method,
|
||||
DTLSv1_method, DTLSv1_server_method, DTLSv1_client_method -
|
||||
create a new SSL_CTX object as framework for TLS/SSL enabled functions
|
||||
SSL_CTX_new, SSL_CTX_up_ref, SSLv3_method, SSLv3_server_method,
|
||||
SSLv3_client_method, TLSv1_method, TLSv1_server_method, TLSv1_client_method,
|
||||
TLSv1_1_method, TLSv1_1_server_method, TLSv1_1_client_method, TLS_method,
|
||||
TLS_server_method, TLS_client_method, SSLv23_method, SSLv23_server_method,
|
||||
SSLv23_client_method, DTLS_method, DTLS_server_method, DTLS_client_method,
|
||||
DTLSv1_method, DTLSv1_server_method, DTLSv1_client_method,
|
||||
DTLSv1_2_method, DTLSv1_2_server_method, DTLSv1_2_client_method
|
||||
- create a new SSL_CTX object as framework for TLS/SSL or DTLS enabled
|
||||
functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX *SSL_CTX_new(const SSL_METHOD *method);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_up_ref(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLS_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLS_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLS_client_method(void);
|
||||
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv23_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv23_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv23_client_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_client_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_client_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_client_method(void);
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_SSL3_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv3_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv3_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv3_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_SSL2
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv2_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv2_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *SSLv2_client_method(void);
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_TLS1_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_TLS1_1_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_1_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_TLS1_2_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *TLSv1_2_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLS_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLS_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLS_client_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_client_method(void);
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS1_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef OPENSSL_NO_DTLS1_2_METHOD
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_server_method(void);
|
||||
const SSL_METHOD *DTLSv1_2_client_method(void);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_new() creates a new B<SSL_CTX> object as framework to establish
|
||||
TLS/SSL enabled connections.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_new() creates a new B<SSL_CTX> object as framework to
|
||||
establish TLS/SSL or DTLS enabled connections. An B<SSL_CTX> object is
|
||||
reference counted. Creating an B<SSL_CTX> object for the first time increments
|
||||
the reference count. Freeing it (using SSL_CTX_free) decrements it. When the
|
||||
reference count drops to zero, any memory or resources allocated to the
|
||||
B<SSL_CTX> object are freed. SSL_CTX_up_ref() increments the reference count for
|
||||
an existing B<SSL_CTX> structure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL_CTX object uses B<method> as connection method. The methods exist
|
||||
in a generic type (for client and server use), a server only type, and a
|
||||
client only type. B<method> can be of the following types:
|
||||
The SSL_CTX object uses B<method> as connection method.
|
||||
The methods exist in a generic type (for client and server use), a server only
|
||||
type, and a client only type.
|
||||
B<method> can be of the following types:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSLv23_method(), SSLv23_server_method(), SSLv23_client_method()
|
||||
=item TLS_method(), TLS_server_method(), TLS_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
These are the general-purpose I<version-flexible> SSL/TLS methods.
|
||||
The actual protocol version used will be negotiated to the highest version
|
||||
mutually supported by the client and the server.
|
||||
The supported protocols are SSLv2, SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2.
|
||||
Most applications should use these method, and avoid the version specific
|
||||
The supported protocols are SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2.
|
||||
Applications should use these methods, and avoid the version-specific
|
||||
methods described below.
|
||||
|
||||
The list of protocols available can be further limited using the
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2>, B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1>,
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1> and B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2> options of the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)> or L<SSL_set_options(3)> functions.
|
||||
Clients should avoid creating "holes" in the set of protocols they support,
|
||||
when disabling a protocol, make sure that you also disable either all previous
|
||||
or all subsequent protocol versions.
|
||||
In clients, when a protocol version is disabled without disabling I<all>
|
||||
previous protocol versions, the effect is to also disable all subsequent
|
||||
protocol versions.
|
||||
=item SSLv23_method(), SSLv23_server_method(), SSLv23_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
The SSLv2 and SSLv3 protocols are deprecated and should generally not be used.
|
||||
Applications should typically use L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)> in combination with
|
||||
the B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3> flag to disable negotiation of SSLv3 via the above
|
||||
I<version-flexible> SSL/TLS methods.
|
||||
The B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2> option is set by default, and would need to be cleared
|
||||
via L<SSL_CTX_clear_options(3)> in order to enable negotiation of SSLv2.
|
||||
Use of these functions is deprecated. They have been replaced with the above
|
||||
TLS_method(), TLS_server_method() and TLS_client_method() respectively. New
|
||||
code should use those functions instead.
|
||||
|
||||
=item TLSv1_2_method(), TLSv1_2_server_method(), TLSv1_2_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
A TLS/SSL connection established with these methods will only understand the
|
||||
TLSv1.2 protocol. A client will send out TLSv1.2 client hello messages and
|
||||
will also indicate that it only understand TLSv1.2. A server will only
|
||||
understand TLSv1.2 client hello messages.
|
||||
TLSv1.2 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item TLSv1_1_method(), TLSv1_1_server_method(), TLSv1_1_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
A TLS/SSL connection established with these methods will only understand the
|
||||
TLSv1.1 protocol. A client will send out TLSv1.1 client hello messages and
|
||||
will also indicate that it only understand TLSv1.1. A server will only
|
||||
understand TLSv1.1 client hello messages.
|
||||
TLSv1.1 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item TLSv1_method(), TLSv1_server_method(), TLSv1_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
A TLS/SSL connection established with these methods will only understand the
|
||||
TLSv1 protocol. A client will send out TLSv1 client hello messages and will
|
||||
indicate that it only understands TLSv1. A server will only understand TLSv1
|
||||
client hello messages.
|
||||
TLSv1 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSLv3_method(), SSLv3_server_method(), SSLv3_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
A TLS/SSL connection established with these methods will only understand the
|
||||
SSLv3 protocol. A client will send out SSLv3 client hello messages and will
|
||||
indicate that it only understands SSLv3. A server will only understand SSLv3
|
||||
client hello messages. The SSLv3 protocol is deprecated and should not be
|
||||
used.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSLv2_method(), SSLv2_server_method(), SSLv2_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
A TLS/SSL connection established with these methods will only understand the
|
||||
SSLv2 protocol. A client will send out SSLv2 client hello messages and will
|
||||
also indicate that it only understand SSLv2. A server will only understand
|
||||
SSLv2 client hello messages. The SSLv2 protocol offers little to no security
|
||||
and should not be used.
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g, EXPORT ciphers and 56-bit DES are no longer available
|
||||
with SSLv2.
|
||||
SSLv3 protocol.
|
||||
The SSLv3 protocol is deprecated and should not be used.
|
||||
|
||||
=item DTLS_method(), DTLS_server_method(), DTLS_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
These are the version-flexible DTLS methods.
|
||||
Currently supported protocols are DTLS 1.0 and DTLS 1.2.
|
||||
|
||||
=item DTLSv1_2_method(), DTLSv1_2_server_method(), DTLSv1_2_client_method()
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -146,7 +141,36 @@ These are the version-specific methods for DTLSv1.
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_new() initializes the list of ciphers, the session cache setting, the
|
||||
callbacks, the keys and certificates and the options to its default values.
|
||||
callbacks, the keys and certificates and the options to their default values.
|
||||
|
||||
TLS_method(), TLS_server_method(), TLS_client_method(), DTLS_method(),
|
||||
DTLS_server_method() and DTLS_client_method() are the I<version-flexible>
|
||||
methods.
|
||||
All other methods only support one specific protocol version.
|
||||
Use the I<version-flexible> methods instead of the version specific methods.
|
||||
|
||||
If you want to limit the supported protocols for the version flexible
|
||||
methods you can use L<SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_min_proto_version(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_max_proto_version(3)> and
|
||||
L<SSL_set_max_proto_version(3)> functions.
|
||||
Using these functions it is possible to choose e.g. TLS_server_method()
|
||||
and be able to negotiate with all possible clients, but to only
|
||||
allow newer protocols like TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2.
|
||||
|
||||
The list of protocols available can also be limited using the
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1>, B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1> and
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2> options of the L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_set_options(3)> functions, but this approach is not recommended.
|
||||
Clients should avoid creating "holes" in the set of protocols they support.
|
||||
When disabling a protocol, make sure that you also disable either all previous
|
||||
or all subsequent protocol versions.
|
||||
In clients, when a protocol version is disabled without disabling I<all>
|
||||
previous protocol versions, the effect is to also disable all subsequent
|
||||
protocol versions.
|
||||
|
||||
The SSLv3 protocol is deprecated and should generally not be used.
|
||||
Applications should typically use L<SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3)> to set
|
||||
the minimum protocol to at least B<TLS1_VERSION>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -163,12 +187,34 @@ the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
The return value points to an allocated SSL_CTX object.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_up_ref() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
Support for SSLv2 and the corresponding SSLv2_method(),
|
||||
SSLv2_server_method() and SSLv2_client_method() functions where
|
||||
removed in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
SSLv23_method(), SSLv23_server_method() and SSLv23_client_method()
|
||||
were deprecated and the preferred TLS_method(), TLS_server_method()
|
||||
and TLS_client_method() functions were introduced in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
All version-specific methods were deprecated in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_clear_options(3)>, L<SSL_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_free(3)|SSL_CTX_free(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_free(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3)>, L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_number, SSL_CTX_sess_connect, SSL_CTX_sess_connect_good, SSL_CTX_sess_connect_renegotiate, SSL_CTX_sess_accept, SSL_CTX_sess_accept_good, SSL_CTX_sess_accept_renegotiate, SSL_CTX_sess_hits, SSL_CTX_sess_cb_hits, SSL_CTX_sess_misses, SSL_CTX_sess_timeouts, SSL_CTX_sess_cache_full - obtain session cache statistics
|
||||
@@ -45,7 +47,7 @@ SSL_CTX_sess_accept_renegotiate() returns the number of start renegotiations
|
||||
in server mode.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_hits() returns the number of successfully reused sessions.
|
||||
In client mode a session set with L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>
|
||||
In client mode a session set with L<SSL_set_session(3)>
|
||||
successfully reused is counted as a hit. In server mode a session successfully
|
||||
retrieved from internal or external cache is counted as a hit.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -69,8 +71,17 @@ The functions return the values indicated in the DESCRIPTION section.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size, SSL_CTX_sess_get_cache_size - manipulate session cache size
|
||||
@@ -29,7 +31,7 @@ case is the size 0, which is used for unlimited size.
|
||||
If adding the session makes the cache exceed its size, then unused
|
||||
sessions are dropped from the end of the cache.
|
||||
Cache space may also be reclaimed by calling
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> to remove
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> to remove
|
||||
expired sessions.
|
||||
|
||||
If the size of the session cache is reduced and more sessions are already
|
||||
@@ -45,9 +47,18 @@ SSL_CTX_sess_get_cache_size() returns the currently valid size.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_set_remove_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_get_remove_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb - provide callback functions for server side external session caching
|
||||
@@ -9,20 +11,20 @@ SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_set_remove_cb, SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb, SS
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_sess_set_new_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
int (*new_session_cb)(SSL *, SSL_SESSION *));
|
||||
int (*new_session_cb)(SSL *, SSL_SESSION *));
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_sess_set_remove_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
void (*remove_session_cb)(SSL_CTX *ctx, SSL_SESSION *));
|
||||
void (*remove_session_cb)(SSL_CTX *ctx, SSL_SESSION *));
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
SSL_SESSION (*get_session_cb)(SSL *, unsigned char *, int, int *));
|
||||
SSL_SESSION (*get_session_cb)(SSL *, const unsigned char *, int, int *));
|
||||
|
||||
int (*SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx))(struct ssl_st *ssl, SSL_SESSION *sess);
|
||||
void (*SSL_CTX_sess_get_remove_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx))(struct ssl_ctx_st *ctx, SSL_SESSION *sess);
|
||||
SSL_SESSION *(*SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx))(struct ssl_st *ssl, unsigned char *data, int len, int *copy);
|
||||
SSL_SESSION *(*SSL_CTX_sess_get_get_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx))(struct ssl_st *ssl, const unsigned char *data, int len, int *copy);
|
||||
|
||||
int (*new_session_cb)(struct ssl_st *ssl, SSL_SESSION *sess);
|
||||
void (*remove_session_cb)(struct ssl_ctx_st *ctx, SSL_SESSION *sess);
|
||||
SSL_SESSION *(*get_session_cb)(struct ssl_st *ssl, unsigned char *data,
|
||||
int len, int *copy);
|
||||
int len, int *copy);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,7 +39,7 @@ of exceeding the timeout value.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb() sets the callback function which is called,
|
||||
whenever a SSL/TLS client proposed to resume a session but the session
|
||||
could not be found in the internal session cache (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>).
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>).
|
||||
(SSL/TLS server only.)
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sess_get_new_cb(), SSL_CTX_sess_get_remove_cb(), and
|
||||
@@ -50,11 +52,11 @@ the NULL pointer is returned.
|
||||
In order to allow external session caching, synchronization with the internal
|
||||
session cache is realized via callback functions. Inside these callback
|
||||
functions, session can be saved to disk or put into a database using the
|
||||
L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)|d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)> interface.
|
||||
L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)> interface.
|
||||
|
||||
The new_session_cb() is called, whenever a new session has been negotiated
|
||||
and session caching is enabled (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>).
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>).
|
||||
The new_session_cb() is passed the B<ssl> connection and the ssl session
|
||||
B<sess>. If the callback returns B<0>, the session will be immediately
|
||||
removed again.
|
||||
@@ -63,7 +65,7 @@ The remove_session_cb() is called, whenever the SSL engine removes a session
|
||||
from the internal cache. This happens when the session is removed because
|
||||
it is expired or when a connection was not shutdown cleanly. It also happens
|
||||
for all sessions in the internal session cache when
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_free(3)|SSL_CTX_free(3)> is called. The remove_session_cb() is passed
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_free(3)> is called. The remove_session_cb() is passed
|
||||
the B<ctx> and the ssl session B<sess>. It does not provide any feedback.
|
||||
|
||||
The get_session_cb() is only called on SSL/TLS servers with the session id
|
||||
@@ -74,14 +76,23 @@ B<data>. With the parameter B<copy> the callback can require the
|
||||
SSL engine to increment the reference count of the SSL_SESSION object,
|
||||
Normally the reference count is not incremented and therefore the
|
||||
session must not be explicitly freed with
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)|d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_free(3)|SSL_CTX_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_sessions - access internal session cache
|
||||
@@ -18,17 +20,26 @@ internal session cache for B<ctx>.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The sessions in the internal session cache are kept in an
|
||||
L<lhash(3)|lhash(3)> type database. It is possible to directly
|
||||
L<lhash(3)> type database. It is possible to directly
|
||||
access this database e.g. for searching. In parallel, the sessions
|
||||
form a linked list which is maintained separately from the
|
||||
L<lhash(3)|lhash(3)> operations, so that the database must not be
|
||||
L<lhash(3)> operations, so that the database must not be
|
||||
modified directly but by using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)|SSL_CTX_add_session(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<lhash(3)|lhash(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)|SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<lhash(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set1_curves, SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list, SSL_set1_curves,
|
||||
SSL_set1_curves_list, SSL_get1_curves, SSL_get_shared_curve,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto, SSL_set_ecdh_auto - EC supported curve functions
|
||||
SSL_set1_curves_list, SSL_get1_curves, SSL_get_shared_curve - EC supported curve functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,15 +20,12 @@ SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto, SSL_set_ecdh_auto - EC supported curve functions
|
||||
int SSL_get1_curves(SSL *ssl, int *curves);
|
||||
int SSL_get_shared_curve(SSL *s, int n);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto(SSL_CTX *ctx, int onoff);
|
||||
int SSL_set_ecdh_auto(SSL *s, int onoff);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set1_curves() sets the supported curves for B<ctx> to B<clistlen>
|
||||
curves in the array B<clist>. The array consist of all NIDs of curves in
|
||||
preference order. For a TLS client the curves are used directly in the
|
||||
supported curves extension. For a TLS server the curves are used to
|
||||
supported curves extension. For a TLS server the curves are used to
|
||||
determine the set of shared curves.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list() sets the supported curves for B<ctx> to
|
||||
@@ -38,7 +36,7 @@ SSL_set1_curves() and SSL_set1_curves_list() are similar except they set
|
||||
supported curves for the SSL structure B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get1_curves() returns the set of supported curves sent by a client
|
||||
in the supported curves extension. It returns the total number of
|
||||
in the supported curves extension. It returns the total number of
|
||||
supported curves. The B<curves> parameter can be B<NULL> to simply
|
||||
return the number of curves for memory allocation purposes. The
|
||||
B<curves> array is in the form of a set of curve NIDs in preference
|
||||
@@ -52,11 +50,6 @@ most applications will only be interested in the first shared curve
|
||||
so B<n> is normally set to zero. If the value B<n> is out of range,
|
||||
NID_undef is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto() and SSL_set_ecdh_auto() set automatic curve
|
||||
selection for server B<ctx> or B<ssl> to B<onoff>. If B<onoff> is 1 then
|
||||
the highest preference curve is automatically used for ECDH temporary
|
||||
keys used during key exchange.
|
||||
|
||||
All these functions are implemented as macros.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
@@ -65,23 +58,10 @@ If an application wishes to make use of several of these functions for
|
||||
configuration purposes either on a command line or in a file it should
|
||||
consider using the SSL_CONF interface instead of manually parsing options.
|
||||
|
||||
The functions SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto() and SSL_set_ecdh_auto() can be used to
|
||||
make a server always choose the most appropriate curve for a client. If set
|
||||
it will override any temporary ECDH parameters set by a server. Previous
|
||||
versions of OpenSSL could effectively only use a single ECDH curve set
|
||||
using a function such as SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_tmp(). Newer applications should
|
||||
just call:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto(ctx, 1);
|
||||
|
||||
and they will automatically support ECDH using the most appropriate shared
|
||||
curve.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set1_curves(), SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list(), SSL_set1_curves(),
|
||||
SSL_set1_curves_list(), SSL_CTX_set_ecdh_auto() and SSL_set_ecdh_auto()
|
||||
return 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set1_curves(), SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list(), SSL_set1_curves() and
|
||||
SSL_set1_curves_list(), return 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get1_curves() returns the number of curves, which may be zero.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -94,10 +74,19 @@ returns -1.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2013-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set0_verify_cert_store, SSL_CTX_set1_verify_cert_store,
|
||||
@@ -54,9 +56,9 @@ any client certificate chain.
|
||||
The chain store is used to build the certificate chain.
|
||||
|
||||
If the mode B<SSL_MODE_NO_AUTO_CHAIN> is set or a certificate chain is
|
||||
configured already (for example using the functions such as
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>) then
|
||||
configured already (for example using the functions such as
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>) then
|
||||
automatic chain building is disabled.
|
||||
|
||||
If the mode B<SSL_MODE_NO_AUTO_CHAIN> is set then automatic chain building
|
||||
@@ -72,20 +74,29 @@ All these functions return 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set0_chain(3)|SSL_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set1_chain(3)|SSL_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)|SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)|SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_build_cert_chain(3)|SSL_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set0_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set1_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add0_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_build_cert_chain(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
These functions were first added to OpenSSL 1.0.2.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2013-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_alpn_protos, SSL_set_alpn_protos, SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb,
|
||||
@@ -11,9 +13,9 @@ protocol negotiation (ALPN)
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_alpn_protos(SSL_CTX *ctx, const unsigned char *protos,
|
||||
unsigned protos_len);
|
||||
unsigned int protos_len);
|
||||
int SSL_set_alpn_protos(SSL *ssl, const unsigned char *protos,
|
||||
unsigned protos_len);
|
||||
unsigned int protos_len);
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
int (*cb) (SSL *ssl,
|
||||
const unsigned char **out,
|
||||
@@ -44,7 +46,8 @@ the application callback.
|
||||
B<cb> is the application defined callback. The B<in>, B<inlen> parameters are a
|
||||
vector in protocol-list format. The value of the B<out>, B<outlen> vector
|
||||
should be set to the value of a single protocol selected from the B<in>,
|
||||
B<inlen> vector. The B<arg> parameter is the pointer set via
|
||||
B<inlen> vector. The B<out> buffer may point directly into B<in>, or to a
|
||||
buffer that outlives the handshake. The B<arg> parameter is the pointer set via
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb().
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_select_next_proto() is a helper function used to select protocols. It
|
||||
@@ -123,4 +126,13 @@ ALPN protocol not selected.
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb, SSL_set_cert_cb - handle certificate callback function
|
||||
@@ -15,10 +17,10 @@ SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb, SSL_set_cert_cb - handle certificate callback function
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb() and SSL_set_cert_cb() sets the B<cert_cb()> callback,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb() and SSL_set_cert_cb() sets the cert_cb() callback,
|
||||
B<arg> value is pointer which is passed to the application callback.
|
||||
|
||||
When B<cert_cb()> is NULL, no callback function is used.
|
||||
When cert_cb() is NULL, no callback function is used.
|
||||
|
||||
cert_cb() is the application defined callback. It is called before a
|
||||
certificate will be used by a client or server. The callback can then inspect
|
||||
@@ -27,7 +29,7 @@ the callback is successful it B<MUST> return 1 even if no certificates have
|
||||
been set. A zero is returned on error which will abort the handshake with a
|
||||
fatal internal error alert. A negative return value will suspend the handshake
|
||||
and the handshake function will return immediately.
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> will return SSL_ERROR_WANT_X509_LOOKUP to
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)> will return SSL_ERROR_WANT_X509_LOOKUP to
|
||||
indicate, that the handshake was suspended. The next call to the handshake
|
||||
function will again lead to the call of cert_cb(). It is the job of the
|
||||
cert_cb() to store information about the state of the last call,
|
||||
@@ -43,7 +45,7 @@ SSL_add1_chain_cert().
|
||||
It might also call SSL_certs_clear() to delete any certificates associated
|
||||
with the B<SSL> object.
|
||||
|
||||
The certificate callback functionality supercedes the (largely broken)
|
||||
The certificate callback functionality supersedes the (largely broken)
|
||||
functionality provided by the old client certificate callback interface.
|
||||
It is B<always> called even is a certificate is already set so the callback
|
||||
can modify or delete the existing certificate.
|
||||
@@ -60,9 +62,18 @@ support it will B<not> be used.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_use_certificate(3)|SSL_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_add1_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2014-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_store, SSL_CTX_get_cert_store - manipulate X509 certificate verification storage
|
||||
@@ -28,17 +30,17 @@ via lookup methods, handled inside the X509_STORE. From the X509_STORE
|
||||
the X509_STORE_CTX used when verifying certificates is created.
|
||||
|
||||
Typically the trusted certificate store is handled indirectly via using
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
Using the SSL_CTX_set_cert_store() and SSL_CTX_get_cert_store() functions
|
||||
it is possible to manipulate the X509_STORE object beyond the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
call.
|
||||
|
||||
Currently no detailed documentation on how to use the X509_STORE
|
||||
object is available. Not all members of the X509_STORE are used when
|
||||
the verification takes place. So will e.g. the verify_callback() be
|
||||
overridden with the verify_callback() set via the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
This document must therefore be updated when documentation about the
|
||||
X509_STORE object and its handling becomes available.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -46,7 +48,7 @@ X509_STORE object and its handling becomes available.
|
||||
|
||||
The X509_STORE structure used by an SSL_CTX is used for verifying peer
|
||||
certificates and building certificate chains, it is also shared by
|
||||
every child SSL structure. Applications wanting finer control can use
|
||||
every child SSL structure. Applications wanting finer control can use
|
||||
functions such as SSL_CTX_set1_verify_cert_store() instead.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
@@ -57,8 +59,17 @@ SSL_CTX_get_cert_store() returns the current setting.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback - set peer certificate verification procedure
|
||||
@@ -8,13 +10,13 @@ SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback - set peer certificate verification procedure
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx, int (*callback)(X509_STORE_CTX *,void *), void *arg);
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx, int (*callback)(X509_STORE_CTX *, void *), void *arg);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback() sets the verification callback function for
|
||||
I<ctx>. SSL objects that are created from I<ctx> inherit the setting valid at
|
||||
the time when L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)> is called.
|
||||
the time when L<SSL_new(3)> is called.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -26,7 +28,7 @@ SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(), the supplied callback function is called
|
||||
instead. By setting I<callback> to NULL, the default behaviour is restored.
|
||||
|
||||
When the verification must be performed, I<callback> will be called with
|
||||
the arguments callback(X509_STORE_CTX *x509_store_ctx, void *arg). The
|
||||
the arguments callback(X509_STORE_CTX *x509_store_ctx, void *arg). The
|
||||
argument I<arg> is specified by the application when setting I<callback>.
|
||||
|
||||
I<callback> should return 1 to indicate verification success and 0 to
|
||||
@@ -35,16 +37,16 @@ returns 0, the handshake will fail. As the verification procedure may
|
||||
allow to continue the connection in case of failure (by always returning 1)
|
||||
the verification result must be set in any case using the B<error>
|
||||
member of I<x509_store_ctx> so that the calling application will be informed
|
||||
about the detailed result of the verification procedure!
|
||||
about the detailed result of the verification procedure!
|
||||
|
||||
Within I<x509_store_ctx>, I<callback> has access to the I<verify_callback>
|
||||
function set using L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>.
|
||||
function set using L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNINGS
|
||||
|
||||
Do not mix the verification callback described in this function with the
|
||||
B<verify_callback> function called during the verification process. The
|
||||
latter is set using the L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
latter is set using the L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
Providing a complete verification procedure including certificate purpose
|
||||
@@ -54,22 +56,21 @@ the B<verify_callback> function.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback() does not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Previous to OpenSSL 0.9.7, the I<arg> argument to B<SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback>
|
||||
was ignored, and I<callback> was called simply as
|
||||
int (*callback)(X509_STORE_CTX *)
|
||||
To compile software written for previous versions of OpenSSL, a dummy
|
||||
argument will have to be added to I<callback>.
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list, SSL_set_cipher_list - choose list of available SSL_CIPHERs
|
||||
@@ -15,7 +17,7 @@ SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list, SSL_set_cipher_list - choose list of available SSL_CIPH
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list() sets the list of available ciphers for B<ctx>
|
||||
using the control string B<str>. The format of the string is described
|
||||
in L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>. The list of ciphers is inherited by all
|
||||
in L<ciphers(1)>. The list of ciphers is inherited by all
|
||||
B<ssl> objects created from B<ctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_cipher_list() sets the list of ciphers only for B<ssl>.
|
||||
@@ -31,33 +33,25 @@ at all.
|
||||
|
||||
It should be noted, that inclusion of a cipher to be used into the list is
|
||||
a necessary condition. On the client side, the inclusion into the list is
|
||||
also sufficient. On the server side, additional restrictions apply. All ciphers
|
||||
have additional requirements. ADH ciphers don't need a certificate, but
|
||||
DH-parameters must have been set. All other ciphers need a corresponding
|
||||
certificate and key.
|
||||
also sufficient unless the security level excludes it. On the server side,
|
||||
additional restrictions apply. All ciphers have additional requirements.
|
||||
ADH ciphers don't need a certificate, but DH-parameters must have been set.
|
||||
All other ciphers need a corresponding certificate and key.
|
||||
|
||||
A RSA cipher can only be chosen, when a RSA certificate is available.
|
||||
RSA export ciphers with a keylength of 512 bits for the RSA key require
|
||||
a temporary 512 bit RSA key, as typically the supplied key has a length
|
||||
of 1024 bit (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)>).
|
||||
RSA ciphers using DHE need a certificate and key and additional DH-parameters
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
A DSA cipher can only be chosen, when a DSA certificate is available.
|
||||
DSA ciphers always use DH key exchange and therefore need DH-parameters
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
When these conditions are not met for any cipher in the list (e.g. a
|
||||
client only supports export RSA ciphers with a asymmetric key length
|
||||
client only supports export RSA ciphers with an asymmetric key length
|
||||
of 512 bits and the server is not configured to use temporary RSA
|
||||
keys), the "no shared cipher" (SSL_R_NO_SHARED_CIPHER) error is generated
|
||||
and the handshake will fail.
|
||||
|
||||
If the cipher list does not contain any SSLv2 cipher suites (this is the
|
||||
default) then SSLv2 is effectively disabled and neither clients nor servers
|
||||
will attempt to use SSLv2.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list() and SSL_set_cipher_list() return 1 if any cipher
|
||||
@@ -65,10 +59,18 @@ could be selected and 0 on complete failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_ciphers(3)|SSL_get_ciphers(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_ciphers(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<ciphers(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list, SSL_set_client_CA_list, SSL_CTX_add_client_CA,
|
||||
@@ -9,7 +11,7 @@ client certificate
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(SSL_CTX *ctx, STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *list);
|
||||
void SSL_set_client_CA_list(SSL *s, STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *list);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_add_client_CA(SSL_CTX *ctx, X509 *cacert);
|
||||
@@ -42,11 +44,11 @@ This list must explicitly be set using SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list() for
|
||||
B<ctx> and SSL_set_client_CA_list() for the specific B<ssl>. The list
|
||||
specified overrides the previous setting. The CAs listed do not become
|
||||
trusted (B<list> only contains the names, not the complete certificates); use
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
to additionally load them for verification.
|
||||
|
||||
If the list of acceptable CAs is compiled in a file, the
|
||||
L<SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)|SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)>
|
||||
function can be used to help importing the necessary data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_client_CA() and SSL_add_client_CA() can be used to add additional
|
||||
@@ -82,13 +84,22 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
Scan all certificates in B<CAfile> and list them as acceptable CAs:
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(ctx,SSL_load_client_CA_file(CAfile));
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(ctx, SSL_load_client_CA_file(CAfile));
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)|SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_load_client_CA_file(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb, SSL_CTX_get_client_cert_cb - handle client certificate callback function
|
||||
@@ -14,11 +16,11 @@ SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb, SSL_CTX_get_client_cert_cb - handle client certifica
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb() sets the B<client_cert_cb()> callback, that is
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb() sets the client_cert_cb() callback, that is
|
||||
called when a client certificate is requested by a server and no certificate
|
||||
was yet set for the SSL object.
|
||||
|
||||
When B<client_cert_cb()> is NULL, no callback function is used.
|
||||
When client_cert_cb() is NULL, no callback function is used.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_client_cert_cb() returns a pointer to the currently set callback
|
||||
function.
|
||||
@@ -29,7 +31,7 @@ using the B<x509> and B<pkey> arguments and "1" must be returned. The
|
||||
certificate will be installed into B<ssl>, see the NOTES and BUGS sections.
|
||||
If no certificate should be set, "0" has to be returned and no certificate
|
||||
will be sent. A negative return value will suspend the handshake and the
|
||||
handshake function will return immediately. L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
handshake function will return immediately. L<SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
will return SSL_ERROR_WANT_X509_LOOKUP to indicate, that the handshake was
|
||||
suspended. The next call to the handshake function will again lead to the call
|
||||
of client_cert_cb(). It is the job of the client_cert_cb() to store information
|
||||
@@ -42,7 +44,7 @@ from the client. A client certificate must only be sent, when the server
|
||||
did send the request.
|
||||
|
||||
When a certificate was set using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)> family of functions,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)> family of functions,
|
||||
it will be sent to the server. The TLS standard requires that only a
|
||||
certificate is sent, if it matches the list of acceptable CAs sent by the
|
||||
server. This constraint is violated by the default behavior of the OpenSSL
|
||||
@@ -56,7 +58,7 @@ If the callback function returns a certificate, the OpenSSL library
|
||||
will try to load the private key and certificate data into the SSL
|
||||
object using the SSL_use_certificate() and SSL_use_private_key() functions.
|
||||
Thus it will permanently install the certificate and key for this SSL
|
||||
object. It will not be reset by calling L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>.
|
||||
object. It will not be reset by calling L<SSL_clear(3)>.
|
||||
If the callback returns no certificate, the OpenSSL library will not send
|
||||
a certificate.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -72,7 +74,7 @@ either adding the intermediate CA certificates into the trusted
|
||||
certificate store for the SSL_CTX object (resulting in having to add
|
||||
CA certificates that otherwise maybe would not be trusted), or by adding
|
||||
the chain certificates using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
function, which is only available for the SSL_CTX object as a whole and that
|
||||
therefore probably can only apply for one client certificate, making
|
||||
the concept of the callback function (to allow the choice from several
|
||||
@@ -80,15 +82,24 @@ certificates) questionable.
|
||||
|
||||
Once the SSL object has been used in conjunction with the callback function,
|
||||
the certificate will be set for the SSL object and will not be cleared
|
||||
even when L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> is being called. It is therefore
|
||||
mandatory to destroy the SSL object using L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
even when L<SSL_clear(3)> is being called. It is therefore
|
||||
mandatory to destroy the SSL object using L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
and create a new one to return to the previous state.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_client_custom_ext, SSL_CTX_add_server_custom_ext - custom TLS extension handling
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_add_client_custom_ext(SSL_CTX *ctx, unsigned int ext_type,
|
||||
custom_ext_add_cb add_cb,
|
||||
custom_ext_free_cb free_cb, void *add_arg,
|
||||
custom_ext_parse_cb parse_cb,
|
||||
void *parse_arg);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_add_server_custom_ext(SSL_CTX *ctx, unsigned int ext_type,
|
||||
custom_ext_add_cb add_cb,
|
||||
custom_ext_free_cb free_cb, void *add_arg,
|
||||
custom_ext_parse_cb parse_cb,
|
||||
void *parse_arg);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_extension_supported(unsigned int ext_type);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef int (*custom_ext_add_cb)(SSL *s, unsigned int ext_type,
|
||||
const unsigned char **out,
|
||||
size_t *outlen, int *al,
|
||||
void *add_arg);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef void (*custom_ext_free_cb)(SSL *s, unsigned int ext_type,
|
||||
const unsigned char *out,
|
||||
void *add_arg);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef int (*custom_ext_parse_cb)(SSL *s, unsigned int ext_type,
|
||||
const unsigned char *in,
|
||||
size_t inlen, int *al,
|
||||
void *parse_arg);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_client_custom_ext() adds a custom extension for a TLS client
|
||||
with extension type B<ext_type> and callbacks B<add_cb>, B<free_cb> and
|
||||
B<parse_cb>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_server_custom_ext() adds a custom extension for a TLS server
|
||||
with extension type B<ext_type> and callbacks B<add_cb>, B<free_cb> and
|
||||
B<parse_cb>.
|
||||
|
||||
In both cases the extension type must not be handled by OpenSSL internally
|
||||
or an error occurs.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_extension_supported() returns 1 if the extension B<ext_type> is handled
|
||||
internally by OpenSSL and 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXTENSION CALLBACKS
|
||||
|
||||
The callback B<add_cb> is called to send custom extension data to be
|
||||
included in ClientHello for TLS clients or ServerHello for servers. The
|
||||
B<ext_type> parameter is set to the extension type which will be added and
|
||||
B<add_arg> to the value set when the extension handler was added.
|
||||
|
||||
If the application wishes to include the extension B<ext_type> it should
|
||||
set B<*out> to the extension data, set B<*outlen> to the length of the
|
||||
extension data and return 1.
|
||||
|
||||
If the B<add_cb> does not wish to include the extension it must return 0.
|
||||
|
||||
If B<add_cb> returns -1 a fatal handshake error occurs using the TLS
|
||||
alert value specified in B<*al>.
|
||||
|
||||
For clients (but not servers) if B<add_cb> is set to NULL a zero length
|
||||
extension is added for B<ext_type>.
|
||||
|
||||
For clients every registered B<add_cb> is always called to see if the
|
||||
application wishes to add an extension to ClientHello.
|
||||
|
||||
For servers every registered B<add_cb> is called once if and only if the
|
||||
corresponding extension was received in ClientHello to see if the application
|
||||
wishes to add the extension to ServerHello. That is, if no corresponding extension
|
||||
was received in ClientHello then B<add_cb> will not be called.
|
||||
|
||||
If an extension is added (that is B<add_cb> returns 1) B<free_cb> is called
|
||||
(if it is set) with the value of B<out> set by the add callback. It can be
|
||||
used to free up any dynamic extension data set by B<add_cb>. Since B<out> is
|
||||
constant (to permit use of constant data in B<add_cb>) applications may need to
|
||||
cast away const to free the data.
|
||||
|
||||
The callback B<parse_cb> receives data for TLS extensions. For TLS clients
|
||||
the extension data will come from ServerHello and for TLS servers it will
|
||||
come from ClientHello.
|
||||
|
||||
The extension data consists of B<inlen> bytes in the buffer B<in> for the
|
||||
extension B<extension_type>.
|
||||
|
||||
If the B<parse_cb> considers the extension data acceptable it must return
|
||||
1. If it returns 0 or a negative value a fatal handshake error occurs
|
||||
using the TLS alert value specified in B<*al>.
|
||||
|
||||
The buffer B<in> is a temporary internal buffer which will not be valid after
|
||||
the callback returns.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The B<add_arg> and B<parse_arg> parameters can be set to arbitrary values
|
||||
which will be passed to the corresponding callbacks. They can, for example,
|
||||
be used to store the extension data received in a convenient structure or
|
||||
pass the extension data to be added or freed when adding extensions.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<ext_type> parameter corresponds to the B<extension_type> field of
|
||||
RFC5246 et al. It is B<not> a NID.
|
||||
|
||||
If the same custom extension type is received multiple times a fatal
|
||||
B<decode_error> alert is sent and the handshake aborts. If a custom extension
|
||||
is received in ServerHello which was not sent in ClientHello a fatal
|
||||
B<unsupported_extension> alert is sent and the handshake is aborted. The
|
||||
ServerHello B<add_cb> callback is only called if the corresponding extension
|
||||
was received in ClientHello. This is compliant with the TLS specifications.
|
||||
This behaviour ensures that each callback is called at most once and that
|
||||
an application can never send unsolicited extensions.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_add_client_custom_ext() and SSL_CTX_add_server_custom_ext() return 1 for
|
||||
success and 0 for failure. A failure can occur if an attempt is made to
|
||||
add the same B<ext_type> more than once, if an attempt is made to use an
|
||||
extension type handled internally by OpenSSL or if an internal error occurs
|
||||
(for example a memory allocation failure).
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_extension_supported() returns 1 if the extension B<ext_type> is handled
|
||||
internally by OpenSSL and 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,14 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb, SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata - set passwd callback for encrypted PEM file handling
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb, SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb, SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata,
|
||||
SSL_set_default_passwd_cb, SSL_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata,
|
||||
SSL_get_default_passwd_cb, SSL_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata - set or
|
||||
get passwd callback for encrypted PEM file handling
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -10,37 +16,56 @@ SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb, SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata - set pass
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx, pem_password_cb *cb);
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata(SSL_CTX *ctx, void *u);
|
||||
pem_password_cb *SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
void *SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
int pem_passwd_cb(char *buf, int size, int rwflag, void *userdata);
|
||||
void SSL_set_default_passwd_cb(SSL *s, pem_password_cb *cb);
|
||||
void SSL_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata(SSL *s, void *u);
|
||||
pem_password_cb *SSL_get_default_passwd_cb(SSL *s);
|
||||
void *SSL_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata(SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb() sets the default password callback called
|
||||
when loading/storing a PEM certificate with encryption.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata() sets a pointer to B<userdata> which
|
||||
will be provided to the password callback on invocation.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata() sets a pointer to userdata, B<u>,
|
||||
which will be provided to the password callback on invocation.
|
||||
|
||||
The pem_passwd_cb(), which must be provided by the application, hands back the
|
||||
password to be used during decryption. On invocation a pointer to B<userdata>
|
||||
is provided. The pem_passwd_cb must write the password into the provided buffer
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb() returns a function pointer to the password
|
||||
callback currently set in B<ctx>. If no callback was explicitly set, the
|
||||
NULL pointer is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata() returns a pointer to the userdata
|
||||
currently set in B<ctx>. If no userdata was explicitly set, the NULL pointer
|
||||
is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_default_passwd_cb(), SSL_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata(),
|
||||
SSL_get_default_passwd_cb() and SSL_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata() perform
|
||||
the same function as their SSL_CTX counterparts, but using an SSL object.
|
||||
|
||||
The password callback, which must be provided by the application, hands back the
|
||||
password to be used during decryption.
|
||||
On invocation a pointer to userdata
|
||||
is provided. The function must store the password into the provided buffer
|
||||
B<buf> which is of size B<size>. The actual length of the password must
|
||||
be returned to the calling function. B<rwflag> indicates whether the
|
||||
callback is used for reading/decryption (rwflag=0) or writing/encryption
|
||||
(rwflag=1).
|
||||
For more details, see L<pem_password_cb(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
When loading or storing private keys, a password might be supplied to
|
||||
protect the private key. The way this password can be supplied may depend
|
||||
on the application. If only one private key is handled, it can be practical
|
||||
to have pem_passwd_cb() handle the password dialog interactively. If several
|
||||
to have the callback handle the password dialog interactively. If several
|
||||
keys have to be handled, it can be practical to ask for the password once,
|
||||
then keep it in memory and use it several times. In the last case, the
|
||||
password could be stored into the B<userdata> storage and the
|
||||
pem_passwd_cb() only returns the password already stored.
|
||||
password could be stored into the userdata storage and the
|
||||
callback only returns the password already stored.
|
||||
|
||||
When asking for the password interactively, pem_passwd_cb() can use
|
||||
When asking for the password interactively, the callback can use
|
||||
B<rwflag> to check, whether an item shall be encrypted (rwflag=1).
|
||||
In this case the password dialog may ask for the same password twice
|
||||
for comparison in order to catch typos, that would make decryption
|
||||
@@ -51,26 +76,40 @@ however not usual, as certificate information is considered public.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb() and SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata()
|
||||
do not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
These functions do not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
The following example returns the password provided as B<userdata> to the
|
||||
The following example returns the password provided as userdata to the
|
||||
calling function. The password is considered to be a '\0' terminated
|
||||
string. If the password does not fit into the buffer, the password is
|
||||
truncated.
|
||||
|
||||
int pem_passwd_cb(char *buf, int size, int rwflag, void *password)
|
||||
int my_cb(char *buf, int size, int rwflag, void *u)
|
||||
{
|
||||
strncpy(buf, (char *)(password), size);
|
||||
buf[size - 1] = '\0';
|
||||
return(strlen(buf));
|
||||
strncpy(buf, (char *)u, size);
|
||||
buf[size - 1] = '\0';
|
||||
return strlen(buf);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb(), SSL_CTX_get_default_passwd_cb_userdata(),
|
||||
SSL_set_default_passwd_cb() and SSL_set_default_passwd_cb_userdata() were
|
||||
first added to OpenSSL 1.1.0
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)|SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_use_certificate(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id, SSL_set_generate_session_id, SSL_has_matching_session_id - manipulate generation of SSL session IDs (server only)
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id, SSL_set_generate_session_id,
|
||||
SSL_has_matching_session_id, GEN_SESSION_CB
|
||||
- manipulate generation of SSL session IDs (server only)
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -14,7 +18,7 @@ SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id, SSL_set_generate_session_id, SSL_has_matching_s
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id(SSL_CTX *ctx, GEN_SESSION_CB cb);
|
||||
int SSL_set_generate_session_id(SSL *ssl, GEN_SESSION_CB, cb);
|
||||
int SSL_has_matching_session_id(const SSL *ssl, const unsigned char *id,
|
||||
unsigned int id_len);
|
||||
unsigned int id_len);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -32,9 +36,8 @@ of the parent context of B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
When a new session is established between client and server, the server
|
||||
generates a session id. The session id is an arbitrary sequence of bytes.
|
||||
The length of the session id is 16 bytes for SSLv2 sessions and between
|
||||
1 and 32 bytes for SSLv3/TLSv1. The session id is not security critical
|
||||
but must be unique for the server. Additionally, the session id is
|
||||
The length of the session id is between 1 and 32 bytes. The session id is not
|
||||
security critical but must be unique for the server. Additionally, the session id is
|
||||
transmitted in the clear when reusing the session so it must not contain
|
||||
sensitive information.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -51,21 +54,14 @@ The callback is only allowed to generate a shorter id and reduce B<id_len>;
|
||||
the callback B<must never> increase B<id_len> or write to the location
|
||||
B<id> exceeding the given limit.
|
||||
|
||||
If a SSLv2 session id is generated and B<id_len> is reduced, it will be
|
||||
restored after the callback has finished and the session id will be padded
|
||||
with 0x00. It is not recommended to change the B<id_len> for SSLv2 sessions.
|
||||
The callback can use the L<SSL_get_version(3)|SSL_get_version(3)> function
|
||||
to check, whether the session is of type SSLv2.
|
||||
|
||||
The location B<id> is filled with 0x00 before the callback is called, so the
|
||||
callback may only fill part of the possible length and leave B<id_len>
|
||||
untouched while maintaining reproducibility.
|
||||
|
||||
Since the sessions must be distinguished, session ids must be unique.
|
||||
Without the callback a random number is used, so that the probability
|
||||
of generating the same session id is extremely small (2^128 possible ids
|
||||
for an SSLv2 session, 2^256 for SSLv3/TLSv1). In order to assure the
|
||||
uniqueness of the generated session id, the callback must call
|
||||
of generating the same session id is extremely small (2^256 for SSLv3/TLSv1).
|
||||
In order to assure the uniqueness of the generated session id, the callback must call
|
||||
SSL_has_matching_session_id() and generate another id if a conflict occurs.
|
||||
If an id conflict is not resolved, the handshake will fail.
|
||||
If the application codes e.g. a unique host id, a unique process number, and
|
||||
@@ -85,10 +81,6 @@ Collisions can also occur when using an external session cache, since
|
||||
the external cache is not tested with SSL_has_matching_session_id()
|
||||
and the same race condition applies.
|
||||
|
||||
When calling SSL_has_matching_session_id() for an SSLv2 session with
|
||||
reduced B<id_len>, the match operation will be performed using the
|
||||
fixed length required and with a 0x00 padded id.
|
||||
|
||||
The callback must return 0 if it cannot generate a session id for whatever
|
||||
reason and return 1 on success.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -102,31 +94,27 @@ server id given, and will fill the rest with pseudo random bytes:
|
||||
#define MAX_SESSION_ID_ATTEMPTS 10
|
||||
static int generate_session_id(const SSL *ssl, unsigned char *id,
|
||||
unsigned int *id_len)
|
||||
{
|
||||
{
|
||||
unsigned int count = 0;
|
||||
const char *version;
|
||||
|
||||
version = SSL_get_version(ssl);
|
||||
if (!strcmp(version, "SSLv2"))
|
||||
/* we must not change id_len */;
|
||||
|
||||
do {
|
||||
RAND_pseudo_bytes(id, *id_len);
|
||||
/* Prefix the session_id with the required prefix. NB: If our
|
||||
* prefix is too long, clip it - but there will be worse effects
|
||||
* anyway, eg. the server could only possibly create 1 session
|
||||
* ID (ie. the prefix!) so all future session negotiations will
|
||||
* fail due to conflicts. */
|
||||
memcpy(id, session_id_prefix,
|
||||
(strlen(session_id_prefix) < *id_len) ?
|
||||
strlen(session_id_prefix) : *id_len);
|
||||
}
|
||||
while(SSL_has_matching_session_id(ssl, id, *id_len) &&
|
||||
do {
|
||||
RAND_pseudo_bytes(id, *id_len);
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Prefix the session_id with the required prefix. NB: If our
|
||||
* prefix is too long, clip it - but there will be worse effects
|
||||
* anyway, eg. the server could only possibly create 1 session
|
||||
* ID (ie. the prefix!) so all future session negotiations will
|
||||
* fail due to conflicts.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
memcpy(id, session_id_prefix,
|
||||
(strlen(session_id_prefix) < *id_len) ?
|
||||
strlen(session_id_prefix) : *id_len);
|
||||
}
|
||||
while (SSL_has_matching_session_id(ssl, id, *id_len) &&
|
||||
(++count < MAX_SESSION_ID_ATTEMPTS));
|
||||
if(count >= MAX_SESSION_ID_ATTEMPTS)
|
||||
if (count >= MAX_SESSION_ID_ATTEMPTS)
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
return 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
@@ -139,12 +127,15 @@ same id is already in the cache.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_version(3)|SSL_get_version(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_get_version(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_generate_session_id(), SSL_set_generate_session_id()
|
||||
and SSL_has_matching_session_id() have been introduced in
|
||||
OpenSSL 0.9.7.
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_info_callback, SSL_CTX_get_info_callback, SSL_set_info_callback, SSL_get_info_callback - handle information callback for SSL connections
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ SSL_CTX_set_info_callback() sets the B<callback> function, that can be used to
|
||||
obtain state information for SSL objects created from B<ctx> during connection
|
||||
setup and use. The setting for B<ctx> is overridden from the setting for
|
||||
a specific SSL object, if specified.
|
||||
When B<callback> is NULL, not callback function is used.
|
||||
When B<callback> is NULL, no callback function is used.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_info_callback() sets the B<callback> function, that can be used to
|
||||
obtain state information for B<ssl> during connection setup and use.
|
||||
@@ -93,10 +95,10 @@ Callback has been called because a handshake is finished.
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
The current state information can be obtained using the
|
||||
L<SSL_state_string(3)|SSL_state_string(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_state_string(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<ret> information can be evaluated using the
|
||||
L<SSL_alert_type_string(3)|SSL_alert_type_string(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_alert_type_string(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -110,44 +112,53 @@ The following example callback function prints state strings, information
|
||||
about alerts being handled and error messages to the B<bio_err> BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
void apps_ssl_info_callback(SSL *s, int where, int ret)
|
||||
{
|
||||
const char *str;
|
||||
int w;
|
||||
{
|
||||
const char *str;
|
||||
int w;
|
||||
|
||||
w=where& ~SSL_ST_MASK;
|
||||
w = where & ~SSL_ST_MASK;
|
||||
|
||||
if (w & SSL_ST_CONNECT) str="SSL_connect";
|
||||
else if (w & SSL_ST_ACCEPT) str="SSL_accept";
|
||||
else str="undefined";
|
||||
if (w & SSL_ST_CONNECT) str = "SSL_connect";
|
||||
else if (w & SSL_ST_ACCEPT) str = "SSL_accept";
|
||||
else str = "undefined";
|
||||
|
||||
if (where & SSL_CB_LOOP)
|
||||
{
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err,"%s:%s\n",str,SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (where & SSL_CB_ALERT)
|
||||
{
|
||||
str=(where & SSL_CB_READ)?"read":"write";
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err,"SSL3 alert %s:%s:%s\n",
|
||||
str,
|
||||
SSL_alert_type_string_long(ret),
|
||||
SSL_alert_desc_string_long(ret));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (where & SSL_CB_EXIT)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (ret == 0)
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err,"%s:failed in %s\n",
|
||||
str,SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
else if (ret < 0)
|
||||
{
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err,"%s:error in %s\n",
|
||||
str,SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (where & SSL_CB_LOOP)
|
||||
{
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err, "%s:%s\n", str, SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (where & SSL_CB_ALERT)
|
||||
{
|
||||
str = (where & SSL_CB_READ) ? "read" : "write";
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err, "SSL3 alert %s:%s:%s\n",
|
||||
str,
|
||||
SSL_alert_type_string_long(ret),
|
||||
SSL_alert_desc_string_long(ret));
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (where & SSL_CB_EXIT)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (ret == 0)
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err, "%s:failed in %s\n",
|
||||
str, SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
else if (ret < 0)
|
||||
{
|
||||
BIO_printf(bio_err, "%s:error in %s\n",
|
||||
str, SSL_state_string_long(s));
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_state_string(3)|SSL_state_string(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_alert_type_string(3)|SSL_alert_type_string(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_state_string(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_alert_type_string(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list, SSL_CTX_get_max_cert_list, SSL_set_max_cert_list, SSL_get_max_cert_list, - manipulate allowed for the peer's certificate chain
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list, SSL_CTX_get_max_cert_list, SSL_set_max_cert_list, SSL_get_max_cert_list - manipulate allowed size for the peer's certificate chain
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -19,7 +21,7 @@ SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list, SSL_CTX_get_max_cert_list, SSL_set_max_cert_list, SSL
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_max_cert_list() sets the maximum size allowed for the peer's
|
||||
certificate chain for all SSL objects created from B<ctx> to be <size> bytes.
|
||||
The SSL objects inherit the setting valid for B<ctx> at the time
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)> is being called.
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)> is being called.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_max_cert_list() returns the currently set maximum size for B<ctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -41,7 +43,7 @@ chain is set.
|
||||
The default value for the maximum certificate chain size is 100kB (30kB
|
||||
on the 16bit DOS platform). This should be sufficient for usual certificate
|
||||
chains (OpenSSL's default maximum chain length is 10, see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>, and certificates
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>, and certificates
|
||||
without special extensions have a typical size of 1-2kB).
|
||||
|
||||
For special applications it can be necessary to extend the maximum certificate
|
||||
@@ -67,11 +69,16 @@ set value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
SSL*_set/get_max_cert_list() have been introduced in OpenSSL 0.9.7.
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_mode, SSL_set_mode, SSL_CTX_get_mode, SSL_get_mode - manipulate SSL engine mode
|
||||
@@ -52,7 +54,7 @@ non-blocking write().
|
||||
|
||||
Never bother the application with retries if the transport is blocking.
|
||||
If a renegotiation take place during normal operation, a
|
||||
L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)> or L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)> would return
|
||||
L<SSL_read(3)> or L<SSL_write(3)> would return
|
||||
with -1 and indicate the need to retry with SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ.
|
||||
In a non-blocking environment applications must be prepared to handle
|
||||
incomplete read/write operations.
|
||||
@@ -64,10 +66,8 @@ return after the handshake and successful completion.
|
||||
=item SSL_MODE_RELEASE_BUFFERS
|
||||
|
||||
When we no longer need a read buffer or a write buffer for a given SSL,
|
||||
then release the memory we were using to hold it. Released memory is
|
||||
either appended to a list of unused RAM chunks on the SSL_CTX, or simply
|
||||
freed if the list of unused chunks would become longer than
|
||||
SSL_CTX->freelist_max_len, which defaults to 32. Using this flag can
|
||||
then release the memory we were using to hold it.
|
||||
Using this flag can
|
||||
save around 34k per idle SSL connection.
|
||||
This flag has no effect on SSL v2 connections, or on DTLS connections.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -81,6 +81,12 @@ DO NOT ENABLE THIS if your application attempts a normal handshake.
|
||||
Only use this in explicit fallback retries, following the guidance
|
||||
in draft-ietf-tls-downgrade-scsv-00.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_MODE_ASYNC
|
||||
|
||||
Enable asynchronous processing. TLS I/O operations may indicate a retry with
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC with this mode set if an asynchronous capable engine is
|
||||
used to perform cryptographic operations. See L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
@@ -92,10 +98,19 @@ SSL_CTX_get_mode() and SSL_get_mode() return the current bitmask.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>, L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)>, L<SSL_write(3)>, L<SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY as been added in OpenSSL 0.9.6.
|
||||
SSL_MODE_ASYNC was first added to OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback, SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback_arg, SSL_set_msg_callback, SSL_get_msg_callback_arg - install callback for observing protocol messages
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback, SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback_arg, SSL_set_msg_callback, SSL_set_msg_callback_arg - install callback for observing protocol messages
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@ available for arbitrary application use.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback() and SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback_arg() specify
|
||||
default settings that will be copied to new B<SSL> objects by
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>. SSL_set_msg_callback() and
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)>. SSL_set_msg_callback() and
|
||||
SSL_set_msg_callback_arg() modify the actual settings of an B<SSL>
|
||||
object. Using a B<0> pointer for I<cb> disables the message callback.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -89,11 +91,15 @@ I<version> will be B<SSL3_VERSION>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback(), SSL_CTX_set_msg_callback_arg(),
|
||||
SSL_set_msg_callback() and SSL_get_msg_callback_arg() were added in OpenSSL 0.9.7.
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_options, SSL_set_options, SSL_CTX_clear_options, SSL_clear_options, SSL_CTX_get_options, SSL_get_options, SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support - manipulate SSL options
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_options, SSL_set_options, SSL_CTX_clear_options,
|
||||
SSL_clear_options, SSL_CTX_get_options, SSL_get_options,
|
||||
SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support - manipulate SSL options
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -21,8 +25,6 @@ SSL_CTX_set_options, SSL_set_options, SSL_CTX_clear_options, SSL_clear_options,
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Note: all these functions are implemented using macros.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_options() adds the options set via bitmask in B<options> to B<ctx>.
|
||||
Options already set before are not cleared!
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -40,17 +42,18 @@ SSL_get_options() returns the options set for B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support() indicates whether the peer supports
|
||||
secure renegotiation.
|
||||
Note, this is implemented via a macro.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The behaviour of the SSL library can be changed by setting several options.
|
||||
The options are coded as bitmasks and can be combined by a logical B<or>
|
||||
The options are coded as bitmasks and can be combined by a bitwise B<or>
|
||||
operation (|).
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_options() and SSL_set_options() affect the (external)
|
||||
protocol behaviour of the SSL library. The (internal) behaviour of
|
||||
the API can be changed by using the similar
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> and SSL_set_mode() functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> and SSL_set_mode() functions.
|
||||
|
||||
During a handshake, the option settings of the SSL object are used. When
|
||||
a new SSL object is created from a context using SSL_new(), the current
|
||||
@@ -61,25 +64,6 @@ The following B<bug workaround> options are available:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_MICROSOFT_SESS_ID_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
www.microsoft.com - when talking SSLv2, if session-id reuse is
|
||||
performed, the session-id passed back in the server-finished message
|
||||
is different from the one decided upon.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NETSCAPE_CHALLENGE_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
Netscape-Commerce/1.12, when talking SSLv2, accepts a 32 byte
|
||||
challenge but then appears to only use 16 bytes when generating the
|
||||
encryption keys. Using 16 bytes is ok but it should be ok to use 32.
|
||||
According to the SSLv3 spec, one should use 32 bytes for the challenge
|
||||
when operating in SSLv2/v3 compatibility mode, but as mentioned above,
|
||||
this breaks this server so 16 bytes is the way to go.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NETSCAPE_REUSE_CIPHER_CHANGE_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 0.9.8q and 1.0.0c, this option has no effect.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_SSLREF2_REUSE_CERT_TYPE_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
@@ -101,10 +85,6 @@ OS X 10.8..10.8.3 has broken support for ECDHE-ECDSA ciphers.
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_TLS_BLOCK_PADDING_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_DONT_INSERT_EMPTY_FRAGMENTS
|
||||
|
||||
Disables a countermeasure against a SSL 3.0/TLS 1.0 protocol
|
||||
@@ -147,10 +127,10 @@ to the server's answer and violate the version rollback protection.)
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_SINGLE_DH_USE
|
||||
|
||||
Always create a new key when using temporary/ephemeral DH parameters
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
(see L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
This option must be used to prevent small subgroup attacks, when
|
||||
the DH parameters were not generated using "strong" primes
|
||||
(e.g. when using DSA-parameters, see L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)>).
|
||||
(e.g. when using DSA-parameters, see L<dhparam(1)>).
|
||||
If "strong" primes were used, it is not strictly necessary to generate
|
||||
a new DH key during each handshake but it is also recommended.
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_SINGLE_DH_USE> should therefore be enabled whenever
|
||||
@@ -164,9 +144,8 @@ This option is no longer implemented and is treated as no op.
|
||||
|
||||
When choosing a cipher, use the server's preferences instead of the client
|
||||
preferences. When not set, the SSL server will always follow the clients
|
||||
preferences. When set, the SSLv3/TLSv1 server will choose following its
|
||||
own preferences. Because of the different protocol, for SSLv2 the server
|
||||
will send its list of preferences to the client and the client chooses.
|
||||
preferences. When set, the SSL/TLS server will choose following its
|
||||
own preferences.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_PKCS1_CHECK_1
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -176,37 +155,16 @@ will send its list of preferences to the client and the client chooses.
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NETSCAPE_CA_DN_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
If we accept a netscape connection, demand a client cert, have a
|
||||
non-self-signed CA which does not have its CA in netscape, and the
|
||||
browser has a cert, it will crash/hang. Works for 3.x and 4.xbeta
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3, SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1, SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1,
|
||||
SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2, SSL_OP_NO_DTLSv1, SSL_OP_NO_DTLSv1_2
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NETSCAPE_DEMO_CIPHER_CHANGE_BUG
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2
|
||||
|
||||
Do not use the SSLv2 protocol.
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 1.0.2g the B<SSL_OP_NO_SSLv2> option is set by default.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_SSLv3
|
||||
|
||||
Do not use the SSLv3 protocol.
|
||||
It is recommended that applications should set this option.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1
|
||||
|
||||
Do not use the TLSv1 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_1
|
||||
|
||||
Do not use the TLSv1.1 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_TLSv1_2
|
||||
|
||||
Do not use the TLSv1.2 protocol.
|
||||
These options turn off the SSLv3, TLSv1, TLSv1.1 or TLSv1.2 protocol
|
||||
versions with TLS or the DTLSv1, DTLSv1.2 versions with DTLS,
|
||||
respectively.
|
||||
As of OpenSSL 1.1.0, these options are deprecated, use
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3)> and
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_max_proto_version(3)> instead.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_OP_NO_SESSION_RESUMPTION_ON_RENEGOTIATION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -237,13 +195,10 @@ B<SECURE RENEGOTIATION> section for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SECURE RENEGOTIATION
|
||||
|
||||
OpenSSL 0.9.8m and later always attempts to use secure renegotiation as
|
||||
OpenSSL always attempts to use secure renegotiation as
|
||||
described in RFC5746. This counters the prefix attack described in
|
||||
CVE-2009-3555 and elsewhere.
|
||||
|
||||
The deprecated and highly broken SSLv2 protocol does not support
|
||||
renegotiation at all: its use is B<strongly> discouraged.
|
||||
|
||||
This attack has far reaching consequences which application writers should be
|
||||
aware of. In the description below an implementation supporting secure
|
||||
renegotiation is referred to as I<patched>. A server not supporting secure
|
||||
@@ -269,14 +224,6 @@ unaware of the unpatched nature of the client.
|
||||
If the option B<SSL_OP_ALLOW_UNSAFE_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION> is set then
|
||||
renegotiation B<always> succeeds.
|
||||
|
||||
B<NB:> a bug in OpenSSL clients earlier than 0.9.8m (all of which are
|
||||
unpatched) will result in the connection hanging if it receives a
|
||||
B<no_renegotiation> alert. OpenSSL versions 0.9.8m and later will regard
|
||||
a B<no_renegotiation> alert as fatal and respond with a fatal
|
||||
B<handshake_failure> alert. This is because the OpenSSL API currently has
|
||||
no provision to indicate to an application that a renegotiation attempt
|
||||
was refused.
|
||||
|
||||
=head2 Patched OpenSSL client and unpatched server.
|
||||
|
||||
If the option B<SSL_OP_LEGACY_SERVER_CONNECT> or
|
||||
@@ -325,31 +272,23 @@ secure renegotiation and 0 if it does not.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3)>,
|
||||
L<dhparam(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_CIPHER_SERVER_PREFERENCE> and
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_NO_SESSION_RESUMPTION_ON_RENEGOTIATION> have been added in
|
||||
OpenSSL 0.9.7.
|
||||
The attempt to always try to use secure renegotiation was added in
|
||||
Openssl 0.9.8m.
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_TLS_ROLLBACK_BUG> has been added in OpenSSL 0.9.6 and was automatically
|
||||
enabled with B<SSL_OP_ALL>. As of 0.9.7, it is no longer included in B<SSL_OP_ALL>
|
||||
and must be explicitly set.
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_DONT_INSERT_EMPTY_FRAGMENTS> has been added in OpenSSL 0.9.6e.
|
||||
Versions up to OpenSSL 0.9.6c do not include the countermeasure that
|
||||
can be disabled with this option (in OpenSSL 0.9.6d, it was always
|
||||
enabled).
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_clear_options() and SSL_clear_options() were first added in OpenSSL
|
||||
0.9.8m.
|
||||
|
||||
B<SSL_OP_ALLOW_UNSAFE_LEGACY_RENEGOTIATION>, B<SSL_OP_LEGACY_SERVER_CONNECT>
|
||||
and the function SSL_get_secure_renegotiation_support() were first added in
|
||||
OpenSSL 0.9.8m.
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,33 +1,6 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=begin comment
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
The portions of the attached software ("Contribution") is developed by
|
||||
Nokia Corporation and is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source
|
||||
license.
|
||||
|
||||
The Contribution, originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of
|
||||
Nokia Corporation, consists of the "PSK" (Pre-Shared Key) ciphersuites
|
||||
support (see RFC 4279) to OpenSSL.
|
||||
|
||||
No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in
|
||||
the OpenSSL open source license shall be deemed granted or received
|
||||
expressly, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not
|
||||
infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any third
|
||||
party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights
|
||||
to make use of the Contribution.
|
||||
|
||||
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN
|
||||
ADDITION TO THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE, NOKIA
|
||||
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY
|
||||
OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR
|
||||
OTHERWISE.
|
||||
|
||||
=end comment
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -38,13 +11,13 @@ SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback, SSL_set_psk_client_callback - set PSK client ca
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *hint,
|
||||
char *identity, unsigned int max_identity_len,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, unsigned int max_psk_len));
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *hint,
|
||||
char *identity, unsigned int max_identity_len,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, unsigned int max_psk_len));
|
||||
void SSL_set_psk_client_callback(SSL *ssl,
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *hint,
|
||||
char *identity, unsigned int max_identity_len,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, unsigned int max_psk_len));
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *hint,
|
||||
char *identity, unsigned int max_identity_len,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, unsigned int max_psk_len));
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
@@ -59,7 +32,7 @@ The callback is set using functions SSL_CTX_set_psk_client_callback()
|
||||
or SSL_set_psk_client_callback(). The callback function is given the
|
||||
connection in parameter B<ssl>, a B<NULL>-terminated PSK identity hint
|
||||
sent by the server in parameter B<hint>, a buffer B<identity> of
|
||||
length B<max_identity_len> bytes where the the resulting
|
||||
length B<max_identity_len> bytes where the resulting
|
||||
B<NULL>-terminated identity is to be stored, and a buffer B<psk> of
|
||||
length B<max_psk_len> bytes where the resulting pre-shared key is to
|
||||
be stored.
|
||||
@@ -78,4 +51,15 @@ the length (> 0) of B<psk> in bytes is returned.
|
||||
Otherwise or on errors callback should return 0. In this case
|
||||
the connection setup fails.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown, SSL_CTX_get_quiet_shutdown, SSL_set_quiet_shutdown, SSL_get_quiet_shutdown - manipulate shutdown behaviour
|
||||
@@ -18,14 +20,14 @@ SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown, SSL_CTX_get_quiet_shutdown, SSL_set_quiet_shutdown,
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown() sets the "quiet shutdown" flag for B<ctx> to be
|
||||
B<mode>. SSL objects created from B<ctx> inherit the B<mode> valid at the time
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)> is called. B<mode> may be 0 or 1.
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)> is called. B<mode> may be 0 or 1.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_quiet_shutdown() returns the "quiet shutdown" setting of B<ctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_quiet_shutdown() sets the "quiet shutdown" flag for B<ssl> to be
|
||||
B<mode>. The setting stays valid until B<ssl> is removed with
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)> or SSL_set_quiet_shutdown() is called again.
|
||||
It is not changed when L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> is called.
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)> or SSL_set_quiet_shutdown() is called again.
|
||||
It is not changed when L<SSL_clear(3)> is called.
|
||||
B<mode> may be 0 or 1.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_quiet_shutdown() returns the "quiet shutdown" setting of B<ssl>.
|
||||
@@ -33,13 +35,13 @@ SSL_get_quiet_shutdown() returns the "quiet shutdown" setting of B<ssl>.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
Normally when a SSL connection is finished, the parties must send out
|
||||
"close notify" alert messages using L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>
|
||||
"close notify" alert messages using L<SSL_shutdown(3)>
|
||||
for a clean shutdown.
|
||||
|
||||
When setting the "quiet shutdown" flag to 1, L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>
|
||||
When setting the "quiet shutdown" flag to 1, L<SSL_shutdown(3)>
|
||||
will set the internal flags to SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN|SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN.
|
||||
(L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)> then behaves like
|
||||
L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)> called with
|
||||
(L<SSL_shutdown(3)> then behaves like
|
||||
L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)> called with
|
||||
SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN|SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN.)
|
||||
The session is thus considered to be shutdown, but no "close notify" alert
|
||||
is sent to the peer. This behaviour violates the TLS standard.
|
||||
@@ -56,8 +58,17 @@ setting.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead, SSL_CTX_set_default_read_ahead, SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead, SSL_set_read_ahead, SSL_get_read_ahead
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead, SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead,
|
||||
SSL_set_read_ahead, SSL_get_read_ahead,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead
|
||||
- manage whether to read as many input bytes as possible
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_get_read_ahead(const SSL *s);
|
||||
void SSL_set_read_ahead(SSL *s, int yes);
|
||||
int SSL_get_read_ahead(const SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
#define SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead(ctx)
|
||||
#define SSL_CTX_set_default_read_ahead(ctx,m)
|
||||
#define SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead(ctx)
|
||||
#define SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(ctx,m)
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(SSL_CTX *ctx, int yes);
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -27,9 +29,7 @@ the underlying BIO (where B<y> > B<x>), then OpenSSL will read all B<y> bytes
|
||||
into its buffer (providing that the buffer is large enough) if reading ahead is
|
||||
on, or B<x> bytes otherwise. The parameter B<yes> or B<m> should be 0 to ensure
|
||||
reading ahead is off, or non zero otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_read_ahead is a synonym for SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead, and
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_default_read_ahead is a synonym for SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_default_read_ahead() is identical to SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead().
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead() and SSL_get_read_ahead() indicate whether reading
|
||||
ahead has been set or not.
|
||||
@@ -37,15 +37,26 @@ ahead has been set or not.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
These functions have no impact when used with DTLS. The return values for
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_read_head() and SSL_get_read_ahead() are undefined for DTLS.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_read_head() and SSL_get_read_ahead() are undefined for DTLS. Setting
|
||||
B<read_ahead> can impact the behaviour of the SSL_pending() function
|
||||
(see L<SSL_pending(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_read_ahead and SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead return 0 if reading ahead is off,
|
||||
SSL_get_read_ahead() and SSL_CTX_get_read_ahead() return 0 if reading ahead is off,
|
||||
and non zero otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_pending(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode, SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode - enable/disable session caching
|
||||
@@ -26,7 +28,7 @@ SSL_CTX object is being maintained, the sessions are unique for each SSL_CTX
|
||||
object.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to reuse a session, a client must send the session's id to the
|
||||
server. It can only send exactly one id. The server then either
|
||||
server. It can only send exactly one id. The server then either
|
||||
agrees to reuse the session or it starts a full handshake (to create a new
|
||||
session).
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,7 +39,7 @@ the external storage if available.
|
||||
|
||||
Since a client may try to reuse a session intended for use in a different
|
||||
context, the session id context must be set by the server (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>).
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
The following session cache modes and modifiers are available:
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -53,7 +55,7 @@ Client sessions are added to the session cache. As there is no reliable way
|
||||
for the OpenSSL library to know whether a session should be reused or which
|
||||
session to choose (due to the abstract BIO layer the SSL engine does not
|
||||
have details about the connection), the application must select the session
|
||||
to be reused by using the L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>
|
||||
to be reused by using the L<SSL_set_session(3)>
|
||||
function. This option is not activated by default.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_SESS_CACHE_SERVER
|
||||
@@ -72,10 +74,10 @@ Enable both SSL_SESS_CACHE_CLIENT and SSL_SESS_CACHE_SERVER at the same time.
|
||||
|
||||
Normally the session cache is checked for expired sessions every
|
||||
255 connections using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> function. Since
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> function. Since
|
||||
this may lead to a delay which cannot be controlled, the automatic
|
||||
flushing may be disabled and
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> can be called
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> can be called
|
||||
explicitly by the application.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_SESS_CACHE_NO_INTERNAL_LOOKUP
|
||||
@@ -94,7 +96,7 @@ sessions negotiated in an SSL/TLS handshake may be cached for possible reuse.
|
||||
Normally a new session is added to the internal cache as well as any external
|
||||
session caching (callback) that is configured for the SSL_CTX. This flag will
|
||||
prevent sessions being stored in the internal cache (though the application can
|
||||
add them manually using L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)|SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>). Note:
|
||||
add them manually using L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>). Note:
|
||||
in any SSL/TLS servers where external caching is configured, any successful
|
||||
session lookups in the external cache (ie. for session-resume requests) would
|
||||
normally be copied into the local cache before processing continues - this flag
|
||||
@@ -119,19 +121,23 @@ SSL_CTX_get_session_cache_mode() returns the currently set cache mode.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)|SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)|SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)|SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_cache_size(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESS_CACHE_NO_INTERNAL_STORE and SSL_SESS_CACHE_NO_INTERNAL
|
||||
were introduced in OpenSSL 0.9.6h.
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context, SSL_set_session_id_context - set context within which session can be reused (server side only)
|
||||
@@ -78,6 +80,15 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version, SSL_set_ssl_method, SSL_get_ssl_method
|
||||
@@ -17,8 +19,8 @@ SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version, SSL_set_ssl_method, SSL_get_ssl_method
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version() sets a new default TLS/SSL B<method> for SSL objects
|
||||
newly created from this B<ctx>. SSL objects already created with
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)> are not affected, except when
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> is being called.
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)> are not affected, except when
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)> is being called.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_ssl_method() sets a new TLS/SSL B<method> for a particular B<ssl>
|
||||
object. It may be reset, when SSL_clear() is called.
|
||||
@@ -29,9 +31,9 @@ set in B<ssl>.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The available B<method> choices are described in
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
When L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> is called and no session is connected to
|
||||
When L<SSL_clear(3)> is called and no session is connected to
|
||||
an SSL object, the method of the SSL object is reset to the method currently
|
||||
set in the corresponding SSL_CTX object.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -54,8 +56,17 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_timeout, SSL_CTX_get_timeout - manipulate timeout values for session caching
|
||||
@@ -30,15 +32,15 @@ valid at the time of the session negotiation. Changes of the timeout value
|
||||
do not affect already established sessions.
|
||||
|
||||
The expiration time of a single session can be modified using the
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)|SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
Expired sessions are removed from the internal session cache, whenever
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> is called, either
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> is called, either
|
||||
directly by the application or automatically (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>)
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>)
|
||||
|
||||
The default value for session timeout is decided on a per protocol
|
||||
basis, see L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)|SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>.
|
||||
basis, see L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>.
|
||||
All currently supported protocols have the same default timeout value
|
||||
of 300 seconds.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -50,10 +52,19 @@ SSL_CTX_get_timeout() returns the currently set timeout value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)|SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)|SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback, SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg,
|
||||
SSL_get_servername_type, SSL_get_servername - handle server name indication
|
||||
(SNI)
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
int (*cb)(SSL *, int *, void *));
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg(SSL_CTX *ctx, void *arg);
|
||||
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_servername(const SSL *s, const int type);
|
||||
int SSL_get_servername_type(const SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback() sets the application callback B<cb>
|
||||
used by a server to perform any actions or configuration required based on
|
||||
the servername extension received in the incoming connection. When B<cb>
|
||||
is NULL, SNI is not used. The B<arg> value is a pointer which is passed to
|
||||
the application callback.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg() sets a context-specific argument to be
|
||||
passed into the callback for this B<SSL_CTX>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_servername() returns a servername extension value of the specified
|
||||
type if provided in the Client Hello or NULL.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_servername_type() returns the servername type or -1 if no servername
|
||||
is present. Currently the only supported type (defined in RFC3546) is
|
||||
B<TLSEXT_NAMETYPE_host_name>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The ALPN and SNI callbacks are both executed during Client Hello processing.
|
||||
The servername callback is executed first, followed by the ALPN callback.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_callback() and
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_servername_arg() both always return 1 indicating success.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_alpn_select_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get0_alpn_selected(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,10 +1,20 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb, SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg,
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_type, SSL_get_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp,
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp - OCSP Certificate Status Request functions
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_cb,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_arg,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_type,
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_type,
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_type,
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp,
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp
|
||||
- OCSP Certificate Status Request functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -12,9 +22,17 @@ SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp - OCSP Certificate Status Request functions
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
int (*callback)(SSL *, void *));
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_cb(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
int (**callback)(SSL *, void *));
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg(SSL_CTX *ctx, void *arg);
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_arg(SSL_CTX *ctx, void **arg);
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type(SSL_CTX *ctx, int type);
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_type(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_set_tlsext_status_type(SSL *s, int type);
|
||||
long SSL_get_tlsext_status_type(SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_get_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp(ssl, unsigned char **resp);
|
||||
long SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp(ssl, unsigned char *resp, int len);
|
||||
@@ -23,16 +41,31 @@ SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp - OCSP Certificate Status Request functions
|
||||
|
||||
A client application may request that a server send back an OCSP status response
|
||||
(also known as OCSP stapling). To do so the client should call the
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_type() function prior to the start of the handshake.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type() function prior to the creation of any SSL
|
||||
objects. Alternatively an application can call the SSL_set_tlsext_status_type()
|
||||
function on an individual SSL object prior to the start of the handshake.
|
||||
Currently the only supported type is B<TLSEXT_STATUSTYPE_ocsp>. This value
|
||||
should be passed in the B<type> argument. The client should additionally provide
|
||||
a callback function to decide what to do with the returned OCSP response by
|
||||
calling SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb(). The callback function should determine
|
||||
whether the returned OCSP response is acceptable or not. The callback will be
|
||||
passed as an argument the value previously set via a call to
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg(). Note that the callback will not be called in
|
||||
the event of a handshake where session resumption occurs (because there are no
|
||||
Certificates exchanged in such a handshake).
|
||||
should be passed in the B<type> argument. Calling
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_type() will return the type B<TLSEXT_STATUSTYPE_ocsp>
|
||||
previously set via SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type() or -1 if not set.
|
||||
|
||||
The client should additionally provide a callback function to decide what to do
|
||||
with the returned OCSP response by calling SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb(). The
|
||||
callback function should determine whether the returned OCSP response is
|
||||
acceptable or not. The callback will be passed as an argument the value
|
||||
previously set via a call to SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg(). Note that the
|
||||
callback will not be called in the event of a handshake where session resumption
|
||||
occurs (because there are no Certificates exchanged in such a handshake).
|
||||
The callback previously set via SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb() can be retrieved
|
||||
by calling SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_cb(), and the argument by calling
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_arg().
|
||||
|
||||
On the client side SSL_get_tlsext_status_type() can be used to determine whether
|
||||
the client has previously called SSL_set_tlsext_status_type(). It will return
|
||||
B<TLSEXT_STATUSTYPE_ocsp> if it has been called or -1 otherwise. On the server
|
||||
side SSL_get_tlsext_status_type() can be used to determine whether the client
|
||||
requested OCSP stapling. If the client requested it then this function will
|
||||
return B<TLSEXT_STATUSTYPE_ocsp>, or -1 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
The response returned by the server can be obtained via a call to
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp(). The value B<*resp> will be updated to point
|
||||
@@ -64,10 +97,31 @@ returned) or SSL_TLSEXT_ERR_ALERT_FATAL (meaning that a fatal error has
|
||||
occurred).
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_cb(), SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_arg(),
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_type() and SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp() return 0 on
|
||||
error or 1 on success.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type(), SSL_set_tlsext_status_type() and
|
||||
SSL_set_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp() return 0 on error or 1 on success.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_type() returns the value previously set by
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type(), or -1 if not set.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_ocsp_resp() returns the length of the OCSP response data
|
||||
or -1 if there is no OCSP response data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_type() returns B<TLSEXT_STATUSTYPE_ocsp> on the client
|
||||
side if SSL_set_tlsext_status_type() was previously called, or on the server
|
||||
side if the client requested OCSP stapling. Otherwise -1 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_tlsext_status_type(), SSL_CTX_get_tlsext_status_type() and
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_status_type() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb - set a callback for session ticket processing
|
||||
@@ -10,28 +12,25 @@ SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb - set a callback for session ticket processing
|
||||
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb(SSL_CTX sslctx,
|
||||
int (*cb)(SSL *s, unsigned char key_name[16],
|
||||
unsigned char iv[EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH],
|
||||
EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, HMAC_CTX *hctx, int enc));
|
||||
unsigned char iv[EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH],
|
||||
EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, HMAC_CTX *hctx, int enc));
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb() sets a callback fuction I<cb> for handling
|
||||
session tickets for the ssl context I<sslctx>. Session tickets, defined in
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb() sets a callback function I<cb> for handling
|
||||
session tickets for the ssl context I<sslctx>. Session tickets, defined in
|
||||
RFC5077 provide an enhanced session resumption capability where the server
|
||||
implementation is not required to maintain per session state. It only applies
|
||||
to TLS and there is no SSLv3 implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
The callback is available when the OpenSSL library was built without
|
||||
I<OPENSSL_NO_TLSEXT> being defined.
|
||||
|
||||
The callback function I<cb> will be called for every client instigated TLS
|
||||
session when session ticket extension is presented in the TLS hello
|
||||
message. It is the responsibility of this function to create or retrieve the
|
||||
cryptographic parameters and to maintain their state.
|
||||
|
||||
The OpenSSL library uses your callback function to help implement a common TLS
|
||||
The OpenSSL library uses your callback function to help implement a common TLS
|
||||
ticket construction state according to RFC5077 Section 4 such that per session
|
||||
state is unnecessary and a small set of cryptographic variables needs to be
|
||||
state is unnecessary and a small set of cryptographic variables needs to be
|
||||
maintained by the callback function implementation.
|
||||
|
||||
In order to reuse a session, a TLS client must send the a session ticket
|
||||
@@ -40,36 +39,37 @@ The server, through the callback function, either agrees to reuse the session
|
||||
ticket information or it starts a full TLS handshake to create a new session
|
||||
ticket.
|
||||
|
||||
Before the callback function is started I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been
|
||||
Before the callback function is started I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been
|
||||
initialised with EVP_CIPHER_CTX_init and HMAC_CTX_init respectively.
|
||||
|
||||
For new sessions tickets, when the client doesn't present a session ticket, or
|
||||
an attempted retreival of the ticket failed, or a renew option was indicated,
|
||||
an attempted retrieval of the ticket failed, or a renew option was indicated,
|
||||
the callback function will be called with I<enc> equal to 1. The OpenSSL
|
||||
library expects that the function will set an arbitary I<name>, initialize
|
||||
library expects that the function will set an arbitrary I<name>, initialize
|
||||
I<iv>, and set the cipher context I<ctx> and the hash context I<hctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
The I<name> is 16 characters long and is used as a key identifier.
|
||||
|
||||
The I<iv> length is the length of the IV of the corresponding cipher. The
|
||||
maximum IV length is L<EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH> bytes defined in B<evp.h>.
|
||||
maximum IV length is B<EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH> bytes defined in B<evp.h>.
|
||||
|
||||
The initialization vector I<iv> should be a random value. The cipher context
|
||||
I<ctx> should use the initialisation vector I<iv>. The cipher context can be
|
||||
set using L<EVP_EncryptInit_ex>. The hmac context can be set using L<HMAC_Init_ex>.
|
||||
The initialization vector I<iv> should be a random value. The cipher context
|
||||
I<ctx> should use the initialisation vector I<iv>. The cipher context can be
|
||||
set using L<EVP_EncryptInit_ex(3)>. The hmac context can be set using
|
||||
L<HMAC_Init_ex(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
When the client presents a session ticket, the callback function with be called
|
||||
with I<enc> set to 0 indicating that the I<cb> function should retreive a set
|
||||
When the client presents a session ticket, the callback function with be called
|
||||
with I<enc> set to 0 indicating that the I<cb> function should retrieve a set
|
||||
of parameters. In this case I<name> and I<iv> have already been parsed out of
|
||||
the session ticket. The OpenSSL library expects that the I<name> will be used
|
||||
to retrieve a cryptographic parameters and that the cryptographic context
|
||||
I<ctx> will be set with the retreived parameters and the initialization vector
|
||||
I<iv>. using a function like L<EVP_DecryptInit_ex>. The I<hctx> needs to be set
|
||||
using L<HMAC_Init_ex>.
|
||||
I<ctx> will be set with the retrieved parameters and the initialization vector
|
||||
I<iv>. using a function like L<EVP_DecryptInit_ex(3)>. The I<hctx> needs to be
|
||||
set using L<HMAC_Init_ex(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
If the I<name> is still valid but a renewal of the ticket is required the
|
||||
callback function should return 2. The library will call the callback again
|
||||
with an arguement of enc equal to 1 to set the new ticket.
|
||||
with an argument of enc equal to 1 to set the new ticket.
|
||||
|
||||
The return value of the I<cb> function is used by OpenSSL to determine what
|
||||
further processing will occur. The following return values have meaning:
|
||||
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ further processing will occur. The following return values have meaning:
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<>2
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates that the I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been set and the session can
|
||||
This indicates that the I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been set and the session can
|
||||
continue on those parameters. Additionally it indicates that the session
|
||||
ticket is in a renewal period and should be replaced. The OpenSSL library will
|
||||
call I<cb> again with an enc argument of 1 to set the new ticket (see RFC5077
|
||||
@@ -86,13 +86,13 @@ call I<cb> again with an enc argument of 1 to set the new ticket (see RFC5077
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<>1
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates that the I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been set and the session can
|
||||
This indicates that the I<ctx> and I<hctx> have been set and the session can
|
||||
continue on those parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<>0
|
||||
|
||||
This indicates that it was not possible to set/retrieve a session ticket and
|
||||
the SSL/TLS session will continue by by negiotationing a set of cryptographic
|
||||
This indicates that it was not possible to set/retrieve a session ticket and
|
||||
the SSL/TLS session will continue by negotiating a set of cryptographic
|
||||
parameters or using the alternate SSL/TLS resumption mechanism, session ids.
|
||||
|
||||
If called with enc equal to 0 the library will call the I<cb> again to get
|
||||
@@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ This indicates an error.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
Session resumption shortcuts the TLS so that the client certificate
|
||||
negiotation don't occur. It makes up for this by storing client certificate
|
||||
negotiation don't occur. It makes up for this by storing client certificate
|
||||
an all other negotiated state information encrypted within the ticket. In a
|
||||
resumed session the applications will have all this state information available
|
||||
exactly as if a full negiotation had occured.
|
||||
exactly as if a full negotiation had occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
If an attacker can obtain the key used to encrypt a session ticket, they can
|
||||
obtain the master secret for any ticket using that key and decrypt any traffic
|
||||
@@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ enable an attacker to obtain the session keys.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
Reference Implemention:
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb(SSL,ssl_tlsext_ticket_key_cb);
|
||||
Reference Implementation:
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tlsext_ticket_key_cb(SSL, ssl_tlsext_ticket_key_cb);
|
||||
....
|
||||
|
||||
static int ssl_tlsext_ticket_key_cb(SSL *s, unsigned char key_name[16], unsigned char *iv, EVP_CIPHER_CTX *ctx, HMAC_CTX *hctx, int enc)
|
||||
@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Reference Implemention:
|
||||
if (RAND_bytes(iv, EVP_MAX_IV_LENGTH) ) {
|
||||
return -1; /* insufficient random */
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
key = currentkey(); /* something that you need to implement */
|
||||
if ( !key ) {
|
||||
/* current key doesn't exist or isn't valid */
|
||||
@@ -148,19 +148,19 @@ Reference Implemention:
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
memcpy(key_name, key->name, 16);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EVP_EncryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv);
|
||||
HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 16, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
return 1;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
} else { /* retrieve session */
|
||||
key = findkey(name);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
if (!key || key->expire < now() ) {
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
HMAC_Init_ex(&hctx, key->hmac_key, 16, EVP_sha256(), NULL);
|
||||
EVP_DecryptInit_ex(&ctx, EVP_aes_128_cbc(), NULL, key->aes_key, iv );
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Reference Implemention:
|
||||
return 2;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return 1;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -181,15 +181,20 @@ returns 0 to indicate the callback function was set.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)|SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)|SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_number(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_sess_set_get_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_id_context(3)>,
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
This function was introduced in OpenSSL 0.9.8h
|
||||
Copyright 2014-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback, SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh, SSL_set_tmp_dh_callback, SSL_set_tmp_dh - handle DH keys for ephemeral key exchange
|
||||
@@ -57,18 +59,17 @@ DH parameters can be reused, as the actual key is newly generated during
|
||||
the negotiation. The risk in reusing DH parameters is that an attacker
|
||||
may specialize on a very often used DH group. Applications should therefore
|
||||
generate their own DH parameters during the installation process using the
|
||||
openssl L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)> application. This application
|
||||
openssl L<dhparam(1)> application. This application
|
||||
guarantees that "strong" primes are used.
|
||||
|
||||
Files dh2048.pem, and dh4096.pem in the 'apps' directory of the current
|
||||
version of the OpenSSL distribution contain the 'SKIP' DH parameters,
|
||||
which use safe primes and were generated verifiably pseudo-randomly.
|
||||
These files can be converted into C code using the B<-C> option of the
|
||||
L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)> application. Generation of custom DH
|
||||
L<dhparam(1)> application. Generation of custom DH
|
||||
parameters during installation should still be preferred to stop an
|
||||
attacker from specializing on a commonly used group. Files dh1024.pem
|
||||
and dh512.pem contain old parameters that must not be used by
|
||||
applications.
|
||||
attacker from specializing on a commonly used group. File dh1024.pem
|
||||
contains old parameters that must not be used by applications.
|
||||
|
||||
An application may either directly specify the DH parameters or
|
||||
can supply the DH parameters via a callback function.
|
||||
@@ -105,7 +106,7 @@ partly left out.)
|
||||
/* Error. */
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (dh_2048 == NULL) {
|
||||
/* Error. */
|
||||
/* Error. */
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh(ctx, dh_2048) != 1) {
|
||||
/* Error. */
|
||||
@@ -122,9 +123,17 @@ on failure. Check the error queue to find out the reason of failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)|SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>, L<dhparam(1)|dhparam(1)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<ciphers(1)>, L<dhparam(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,159 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback, SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa, SSL_CTX_need_tmp_rsa, SSL_set_tmp_rsa_callback, SSL_set_tmp_rsa, SSL_need_tmp_rsa - handle RSA keys for ephemeral key exchange
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
RSA *(*tmp_rsa_callback)(SSL *ssl, int is_export, int keylength));
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa(SSL_CTX *ctx, RSA *rsa);
|
||||
long SSL_CTX_need_tmp_rsa(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_set_tmp_rsa_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
RSA *(*tmp_rsa_callback)(SSL *ssl, int is_export, int keylength));
|
||||
long SSL_set_tmp_rsa(SSL *ssl, RSA *rsa)
|
||||
long SSL_need_tmp_rsa(SSL *ssl)
|
||||
|
||||
RSA *(*tmp_rsa_callback)(SSL *ssl, int is_export, int keylength);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback() sets the callback function for B<ctx> to be
|
||||
used when a temporary/ephemeral RSA key is required to B<tmp_rsa_callback>.
|
||||
The callback is inherited by all SSL objects newly created from B<ctx>
|
||||
with <SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>. Already created SSL objects are not affected.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa() sets the temporary/ephemeral RSA key to be used to be
|
||||
B<rsa>. The key is inherited by all SSL objects newly created from B<ctx>
|
||||
with <SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>. Already created SSL objects are not affected.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_need_tmp_rsa() returns 1, if a temporary/ephemeral RSA key is needed
|
||||
for RSA-based strength-limited 'exportable' ciphersuites because a RSA key
|
||||
with a keysize larger than 512 bits is installed.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_tmp_rsa_callback() sets the callback only for B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_tmp_rsa() sets the key only for B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_need_tmp_rsa() returns 1, if a temporary/ephemeral RSA key is needed,
|
||||
for RSA-based strength-limited 'exportable' ciphersuites because a RSA key
|
||||
with a keysize larger than 512 bits is installed.
|
||||
|
||||
These functions apply to SSL/TLS servers only.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
When using a cipher with RSA authentication, an ephemeral RSA key exchange
|
||||
can take place. In this case the session data are negotiated using the
|
||||
ephemeral/temporary RSA key and the RSA key supplied and certified
|
||||
by the certificate chain is only used for signing.
|
||||
|
||||
Under previous export restrictions, ciphers with RSA keys shorter (512 bits)
|
||||
than the usual key length of 1024 bits were created. To use these ciphers
|
||||
with RSA keys of usual length, an ephemeral key exchange must be performed,
|
||||
as the normal (certified) key cannot be directly used.
|
||||
|
||||
Using ephemeral RSA key exchange yields forward secrecy, as the connection
|
||||
can only be decrypted, when the RSA key is known. By generating a temporary
|
||||
RSA key inside the server application that is lost when the application
|
||||
is left, it becomes impossible for an attacker to decrypt past sessions,
|
||||
even if he gets hold of the normal (certified) RSA key, as this key was
|
||||
used for signing only. The downside is that creating a RSA key is
|
||||
computationally expensive.
|
||||
|
||||
Additionally, the use of ephemeral RSA key exchange is only allowed in
|
||||
the TLS standard, when the RSA key can be used for signing only, that is
|
||||
for export ciphers. Using ephemeral RSA key exchange for other purposes
|
||||
violates the standard and can break interoperability with clients.
|
||||
It is therefore strongly recommended to not use ephemeral RSA key
|
||||
exchange and use DHE (Ephemeral Diffie-Hellman) key exchange instead
|
||||
in order to achieve forward secrecy (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
An application may either directly specify the key or can supply the key via a
|
||||
callback function. The callback approach has the advantage, that the callback
|
||||
may generate the key only in case it is actually needed. As the generation of a
|
||||
RSA key is however costly, it will lead to a significant delay in the handshake
|
||||
procedure. Another advantage of the callback function is that it can supply
|
||||
keys of different size while the explicit setting of the key is only useful for
|
||||
key size of 512 bits to satisfy the export restricted ciphers and does give
|
||||
away key length if a longer key would be allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
The B<tmp_rsa_callback> is called with the B<keylength> needed and
|
||||
the B<is_export> information. The B<is_export> flag is set, when the
|
||||
ephemeral RSA key exchange is performed with an export cipher.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
Generate temporary RSA keys to prepare ephemeral RSA key exchange. As the
|
||||
generation of a RSA key costs a lot of computer time, they saved for later
|
||||
reuse. For demonstration purposes, two keys for 512 bits and 1024 bits
|
||||
respectively are generated.
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
/* Set up ephemeral RSA stuff */
|
||||
RSA *rsa_512 = NULL;
|
||||
RSA *rsa_1024 = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
rsa_512 = RSA_generate_key(512,RSA_F4,NULL,NULL);
|
||||
if (rsa_512 == NULL)
|
||||
evaluate_error_queue();
|
||||
|
||||
rsa_1024 = RSA_generate_key(1024,RSA_F4,NULL,NULL);
|
||||
if (rsa_1024 == NULL)
|
||||
evaluate_error_queue();
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
|
||||
RSA *tmp_rsa_callback(SSL *s, int is_export, int keylength)
|
||||
{
|
||||
RSA *rsa_tmp=NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
switch (keylength) {
|
||||
case 512:
|
||||
if (rsa_512)
|
||||
rsa_tmp = rsa_512;
|
||||
else { /* generate on the fly, should not happen in this example */
|
||||
rsa_tmp = RSA_generate_key(keylength,RSA_F4,NULL,NULL);
|
||||
rsa_512 = rsa_tmp; /* Remember for later reuse */
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case 1024:
|
||||
if (rsa_1024)
|
||||
rsa_tmp=rsa_1024;
|
||||
else
|
||||
should_not_happen_in_this_example();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default:
|
||||
/* Generating a key on the fly is very costly, so use what is there */
|
||||
if (rsa_1024)
|
||||
rsa_tmp=rsa_1024;
|
||||
else
|
||||
rsa_tmp=rsa_512; /* Use at least a shorter key */
|
||||
}
|
||||
return(rsa_tmp);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa_callback() and SSL_set_tmp_rsa_callback() do not return
|
||||
diagnostic output.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_tmp_rsa() and SSL_set_tmp_rsa() do return 1 on success and 0
|
||||
on failure. Check the error queue to find out the reason of failure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_need_tmp_rsa() and SSL_need_tmp_rsa() return 1 if a temporary
|
||||
RSA key is needed and 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)|SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_tmp_dh_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<ciphers(1)|ciphers(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,21 +1,24 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_verify, SSL_set_verify, SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth, SSL_set_verify_depth - set peer certificate verification parameters
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_verify, SSL_set_verify,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth, SSL_set_verify_depth,
|
||||
SSL_verify_cb
|
||||
- set peer certificate verification parameters
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_verify(SSL_CTX *ctx, int mode,
|
||||
int (*verify_callback)(int, X509_STORE_CTX *));
|
||||
void SSL_set_verify(SSL *s, int mode,
|
||||
int (*verify_callback)(int, X509_STORE_CTX *));
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth(SSL_CTX *ctx,int depth);
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_verify(SSL_CTX *ctx, int mode, SSL_verify_cb verify_callback);
|
||||
void SSL_set_verify(SSL *s, int mode, SSL_verify_cb verify_callback);
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth(SSL_CTX *ctx, int depth);
|
||||
void SSL_set_verify_depth(SSL *s, int depth);
|
||||
|
||||
int verify_callback(int preverify_ok, X509_STORE_CTX *x509_ctx);
|
||||
typedef int (*SSL_verify_cb)(int preverify_ok, X509_STORE_CTX *x509_ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -29,7 +32,7 @@ shall be specified, the NULL pointer can be used for B<verify_callback>. In
|
||||
this case last B<verify_callback> set specifically for this B<ssl> remains. If
|
||||
no special B<callback> was set before, the default callback for the underlying
|
||||
B<ctx> is used, that was valid at the time B<ssl> was created with
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_verify_depth() sets the maximum B<depth> for the certificate chain
|
||||
verification that shall be allowed for B<ctx>. (See the BUGS section.)
|
||||
@@ -52,7 +55,7 @@ client, so the client will not send a certificate.
|
||||
B<Client mode:> if not using an anonymous cipher (by default disabled), the
|
||||
server will send a certificate which will be checked. The result of the
|
||||
certificate verification process can be checked after the TLS/SSL handshake
|
||||
using the L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)> function.
|
||||
using the L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)> function.
|
||||
The handshake will be continued regardless of the verification result.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_VERIFY_PEER
|
||||
@@ -89,13 +92,12 @@ B<Client mode:> ignored
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
Exactly one of the B<mode> flags SSL_VERIFY_NONE and SSL_VERIFY_PEER must be
|
||||
set at any time.
|
||||
If the B<mode> is SSL_VERIFY_NONE none of the other flags may be set.
|
||||
|
||||
The actual verification procedure is performed either using the built-in
|
||||
verification procedure or using another application provided verification
|
||||
function set with
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)>.
|
||||
The following descriptions apply in the case of the built-in procedure. An
|
||||
application provided procedure also has access to the verify depth information
|
||||
and the verify_callback() function, but the way this information is used
|
||||
@@ -138,7 +140,7 @@ the verification process is continued. If B<verify_callback> always returns
|
||||
1, the TLS/SSL handshake will not be terminated with respect to verification
|
||||
failures and the connection will be established. The calling process can
|
||||
however retrieve the error code of the last verification error using
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)> or by maintaining its
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)> or by maintaining its
|
||||
own error storage managed by B<verify_callback>.
|
||||
|
||||
If no B<verify_callback> is specified, the default callback will be used.
|
||||
@@ -149,14 +151,9 @@ alert message, if SSL_VERIFY_PEER is set.
|
||||
=head1 BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
In client mode, it is not checked whether the SSL_VERIFY_PEER flag
|
||||
is set, but whether SSL_VERIFY_NONE is not set. This can lead to
|
||||
unexpected behaviour, if the SSL_VERIFY_PEER and SSL_VERIFY_NONE are not
|
||||
used as required (exactly one must be set at any time).
|
||||
|
||||
The certificate verification depth set with SSL[_CTX]_verify_depth()
|
||||
stops the verification at a certain depth. The error message produced
|
||||
will be that of an incomplete certificate chain and not
|
||||
X509_V_ERR_CERT_CHAIN_TOO_LONG as may be expected.
|
||||
is set, but whether any flags are set. This can lead to
|
||||
unexpected behaviour if SSL_VERIFY_PEER and other flags are not used as
|
||||
required.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -176,8 +173,8 @@ certificates.
|
||||
|
||||
The example makes use of the ex_data technique to store application data
|
||||
into/retrieve application data from the SSL structure
|
||||
(see L<SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)|SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
(see L<SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
typedef struct {
|
||||
@@ -221,7 +218,7 @@ L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
preverify_ok = 0;
|
||||
err = X509_V_ERR_CERT_CHAIN_TOO_LONG;
|
||||
X509_STORE_CTX_set_error(ctx, err);
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
if (!preverify_ok) {
|
||||
printf("verify error:num=%d:%s:depth=%d:%s\n", err,
|
||||
X509_verify_cert_error_string(err), depth, buf);
|
||||
@@ -237,7 +234,7 @@ L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
if (!preverify_ok && (err == X509_V_ERR_UNABLE_TO_GET_ISSUER_CERT))
|
||||
{
|
||||
X509_NAME_oneline(X509_get_issuer_name(ctx->current_cert), buf, 256);
|
||||
X509_NAME_oneline(X509_get_issuer_name(err_cert), buf, 256);
|
||||
printf("issuer= %s\n", buf);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -269,9 +266,9 @@ L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
*/
|
||||
mydata.verify_depth = verify_depth; ...
|
||||
SSL_set_ex_data(ssl, mydata_index, &mydata);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
SSL_accept(ssl); /* check of success left out for clarity */
|
||||
SSL_accept(ssl); /* check of success left out for clarity */
|
||||
if (peer = SSL_get_peer_certificate(ssl))
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (SSL_get_verify_result(ssl) == X509_V_OK)
|
||||
@@ -282,13 +279,22 @@ L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)|SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)|SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(7)>, L<SSL_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_get_verify_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_verify_callback(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_ex_new_index(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,20 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file, SSL_use_certificate, SSL_use_certificate_ASN1, SSL_use_certificate_file, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file, SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey, SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file, SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey, SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_file, SSL_use_PrivateKey_file, SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_use_PrivateKey, SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey, SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_file, SSL_CTX_check_private_key, SSL_check_private_key - load certificate and key data
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file, SSL_use_certificate, SSL_use_certificate_ASN1,
|
||||
SSL_use_certificate_file, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file,
|
||||
SSL_use_certificate_chain_file,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey, SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file, SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_file,
|
||||
SSL_use_PrivateKey_file, SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1, SSL_use_PrivateKey,
|
||||
SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey, SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1,
|
||||
SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_file, SSL_CTX_check_private_key, SSL_check_private_key
|
||||
- load certificate and key data
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -16,16 +28,17 @@ SSL_CTX_use_certificate, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1, SSL_CTX_use_certificate_f
|
||||
int SSL_use_certificate_file(SSL *ssl, const char *file, int type);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(SSL_CTX *ctx, const char *file);
|
||||
int SSL_use_certificate_chain_file(SSL *ssl, const char *file);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey(SSL_CTX *ctx, EVP_PKEY *pkey);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1(int pk, SSL_CTX *ctx, unsigned char *d,
|
||||
long len);
|
||||
long len);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(SSL_CTX *ctx, const char *file, int type);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey(SSL_CTX *ctx, RSA *rsa);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1(SSL_CTX *ctx, unsigned char *d, long len);
|
||||
int SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey_file(SSL_CTX *ctx, const char *file, int type);
|
||||
int SSL_use_PrivateKey(SSL *ssl, EVP_PKEY *pkey);
|
||||
int SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1(int pk,SSL *ssl, unsigned char *d, long len);
|
||||
int SSL_use_PrivateKey_ASN1(int pk, SSL *ssl, unsigned char *d, long len);
|
||||
int SSL_use_PrivateKey_file(SSL *ssl, const char *file, int type);
|
||||
int SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey(SSL *ssl, RSA *rsa);
|
||||
int SSL_use_RSAPrivateKey_ASN1(SSL *ssl, unsigned char *d, long len);
|
||||
@@ -41,18 +54,18 @@ or SSL object, respectively.
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL_CTX_* class of functions loads the certificates and keys into the
|
||||
SSL_CTX object B<ctx>. The information is passed to SSL objects B<ssl>
|
||||
created from B<ctx> with L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)> by copying, so that
|
||||
created from B<ctx> with L<SSL_new(3)> by copying, so that
|
||||
changes applied to B<ctx> do not propagate to already existing SSL objects.
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL_* class of functions only loads certificates and keys into a
|
||||
specific SSL object. The specific information is kept, when
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> is called for this SSL object.
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)> is called for this SSL object.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate() loads the certificate B<x> into B<ctx>,
|
||||
SSL_use_certificate() loads B<x> into B<ssl>. The rest of the
|
||||
certificates needed to form the complete certificate chain can be
|
||||
specified using the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_ASN1() loads the ASN1 encoded certificate from
|
||||
@@ -66,12 +79,12 @@ SSL_use_certificate_file() loads the certificate from B<file> into B<ssl>.
|
||||
See the NOTES section on why SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file()
|
||||
should be preferred.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file() loads a certificate chain from
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file() loads a certificate chain from
|
||||
B<file> into B<ctx>. The certificates must be in PEM format and must
|
||||
be sorted starting with the subject's certificate (actual client or server
|
||||
certificate), followed by intermediate CA certificates if applicable, and
|
||||
ending at the highest level (root) CA.
|
||||
There is no corresponding function working on a single SSL object.
|
||||
ending at the highest level (root) CA. SSL_use_certificate_chain_file() is
|
||||
similar except it loads the certificate chain into B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey() adds B<pkey> as private key to B<ctx>.
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_RSAPrivateKey() adds the private key B<rsa> of type RSA
|
||||
@@ -81,7 +94,7 @@ If a certificate has already been set and the private does not belong
|
||||
to the certificate an error is returned. To change a certificate, private
|
||||
key pair the new certificate needs to be set with SSL_use_certificate()
|
||||
or SSL_CTX_use_certificate() before setting the private key with
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey() or SSL_use_PrivateKey().
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey() or SSL_use_PrivateKey().
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_ASN1() adds the private key of type B<pk>
|
||||
@@ -108,22 +121,22 @@ the same check for B<ssl>. If no key/certificate was explicitly added for
|
||||
this B<ssl>, the last item added into B<ctx> will be checked.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
The internal certificate store of OpenSSL can hold several private
|
||||
key/certificate pairs at a time. The certificate used depends on the
|
||||
cipher selected, see also L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>.
|
||||
cipher selected, see also L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
When reading certificates and private keys from file, files of type
|
||||
SSL_FILETYPE_ASN1 (also known as B<DER>, binary encoding) can only contain
|
||||
one certificate or private key, consequently
|
||||
one certificate or private key, consequently
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file() is only applicable to PEM formatting.
|
||||
Files of type SSL_FILETYPE_PEM can contain more than one item.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file() adds the first certificate found
|
||||
in the file to the certificate store. The other certificates are added
|
||||
to the store of chain certificates using L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>. Note: versions of OpenSSL before 1.0.2 only had a single
|
||||
to the store of chain certificates using L<SSL_CTX_add1_chain_cert(3)>. Note: versions of OpenSSL before 1.0.2 only had a single
|
||||
certificate chain store for all certificate types, OpenSSL 1.0.2 and later
|
||||
have a separate chain store for each type. SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file()
|
||||
have a separate chain store for each type. SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file()
|
||||
should be used instead of the SSL_CTX_use_certificate_file() function in order
|
||||
to allow the use of complete certificate chains even when no trusted CA
|
||||
storage is used or when the CA issuing the certificate shall not be added to
|
||||
@@ -132,12 +145,12 @@ the trusted CA storage.
|
||||
If additional certificates are needed to complete the chain during the
|
||||
TLS negotiation, CA certificates are additionally looked up in the
|
||||
locations of trusted CA certificates, see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
The private keys loaded from file can be encrypted. In order to successfully
|
||||
load encrypted keys, a function returning the passphrase must have been
|
||||
supplied, see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)>.
|
||||
(Certificate files might be encrypted as well from the technical point
|
||||
of view, it however does not make sense as the data in the certificate
|
||||
is considered public anyway.)
|
||||
@@ -149,17 +162,21 @@ Otherwise check out the error stack to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)|SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)|SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_default_passwd_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Support for DER encoded private keys (SSL_FILETYPE_ASN1) in
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file() and SSL_use_PrivateKey_file() was added
|
||||
in 0.9.8 .
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,33 +1,6 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=begin comment
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
The portions of the attached software ("Contribution") is developed by
|
||||
Nokia Corporation and is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source
|
||||
license.
|
||||
|
||||
The Contribution, originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of
|
||||
Nokia Corporation, consists of the "PSK" (Pre-Shared Key) ciphersuites
|
||||
support (see RFC 4279) to OpenSSL.
|
||||
|
||||
No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in
|
||||
the OpenSSL open source license shall be deemed granted or received
|
||||
expressly, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not
|
||||
infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any third
|
||||
party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights
|
||||
to make use of the Contribution.
|
||||
|
||||
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN
|
||||
ADDITION TO THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE, NOKIA
|
||||
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY
|
||||
OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR
|
||||
OTHERWISE.
|
||||
|
||||
=end comment
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -35,7 +8,6 @@ SSL_CTX_use_psk_identity_hint, SSL_use_psk_identity_hint,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_psk_server_callback, SSL_set_psk_server_callback - set PSK
|
||||
identity hint to use
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
@@ -44,11 +16,11 @@ identity hint to use
|
||||
int SSL_use_psk_identity_hint(SSL *ssl, const char *hint);
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_CTX_set_psk_server_callback(SSL_CTX *ctx,
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *identity,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, int max_psk_len));
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *identity,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, int max_psk_len));
|
||||
void SSL_set_psk_server_callback(SSL *ssl,
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *identity,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, int max_psk_len));
|
||||
unsigned int (*callback)(SSL *ssl, const char *identity,
|
||||
unsigned char *psk, int max_psk_len));
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
@@ -103,4 +75,15 @@ completely.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_serverinfo, SSL_CTX_use_serverinfo_file - use serverinfo extension
|
||||
@@ -20,8 +22,8 @@ A "serverinfo" extension is returned in response to an empty ClientHello
|
||||
Extension.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_serverinfo() loads one or more serverinfo extensions from
|
||||
a byte array into B<ctx>. The extensions must be concatenated into a
|
||||
sequence of bytes. Each extension must consist of a 2-byte Extension Type,
|
||||
a byte array into B<ctx>. The extensions must be concatenated into a
|
||||
sequence of bytes. Each extension must consist of a 2-byte Extension Type,
|
||||
a 2-byte length, and then length bytes of extension_data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_serverinfo_file() loads one or more serverinfo extensions from
|
||||
@@ -38,17 +40,19 @@ use the serverinfo extension for multiple certificates,
|
||||
SSL_CTX_use_serverinfo() needs to be called multiple times, once B<after>
|
||||
each time a certificate is loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
On success, the functions return 1.
|
||||
On failure, the functions return 0. Check out the error stack to find out
|
||||
the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
Copyright 2013-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_free - free an allocated SSL_SESSION structure
|
||||
@@ -15,12 +17,13 @@ SSL_SESSION_free - free an allocated SSL_SESSION structure
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_free() decrements the reference count of B<session> and removes
|
||||
the B<SSL_SESSION> structure pointed to by B<session> and frees up the allocated
|
||||
memory, if the reference count has reached 0.
|
||||
If B<session> is NULL nothing is done.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION objects are allocated, when a TLS/SSL handshake operation
|
||||
is successfully completed. Depending on the settings, see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
the SSL_SESSION objects are internally referenced by the SSL_CTX and
|
||||
linked into its session cache. SSL objects may be using the SSL_SESSION object;
|
||||
as a session may be reused, several SSL objects may be using one SSL_SESSION
|
||||
@@ -31,13 +34,13 @@ dangling pointers. These failures may also appear delayed, e.g.
|
||||
when an SSL_SESSION object was completely freed as the reference count
|
||||
incorrectly became 0, but it is still referenced in the internal
|
||||
session cache and the cache list is processed during a
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> operation.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)> operation.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_free() must only be called for SSL_SESSION objects, for
|
||||
which the reference count was explicitly incremented (e.g.
|
||||
by calling SSL_get1_session(), see L<SSL_get_session(3)|SSL_get_session(3)>)
|
||||
by calling SSL_get1_session(), see L<SSL_get_session(3)>)
|
||||
or when the SSL_SESSION object was generated outside a TLS handshake
|
||||
operation, e.g. by using L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)|d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>.
|
||||
operation, e.g. by using L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>.
|
||||
It must not be called on other SSL_SESSION objects, as this would cause
|
||||
incorrect reference counts and therefore program failures.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -47,9 +50,18 @@ SSL_SESSION_free() does not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_session(3)|SSL_get_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)|d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<d2i_SSL_SESSION(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_get_ex_new_index, SSL_SESSION_set_ex_data, SSL_SESSION_get_ex_data - internal application specific data functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_SESSION_get_ex_new_index(long argl, void *argp,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_new *new_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_dup *dup_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_free *free_func);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_SESSION_set_ex_data(SSL_SESSION *session, int idx, void *arg);
|
||||
|
||||
void *SSL_SESSION_get_ex_data(const SSL_SESSION *session, int idx);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef int new_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef void free_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef int dup_func(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *to, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *from, void *from_d,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Several OpenSSL structures can have application specific data attached to them.
|
||||
These functions are used internally by OpenSSL to manipulate application
|
||||
specific data attached to a specific structure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_get_ex_new_index() is used to register a new index for application
|
||||
specific data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_set_ex_data() is used to store application data at B<arg> for B<idx>
|
||||
into the B<session> object.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_get_ex_data() is used to retrieve the information for B<idx> from
|
||||
B<session>.
|
||||
|
||||
A detailed description for the B<*_get_ex_new_index()> functionality
|
||||
can be found in L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>.
|
||||
The B<*_get_ex_data()> and B<*_set_ex_data()> functionality is described in
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNINGS
|
||||
|
||||
The application data is only maintained for sessions held in memory. The
|
||||
application data is not included when dumping the session with
|
||||
i2d_SSL_SESSION() (and all functions indirectly calling the dump functions
|
||||
like PEM_write_SSL_SESSION() and PEM_write_bio_SSL_SESSION()) and can
|
||||
therefore not be restored.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>,
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_get_time, SSL_SESSION_set_time, SSL_SESSION_get_timeout, SSL_SESSION_set_timeout - retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_get_time, SSL_SESSION_set_time, SSL_SESSION_get_timeout,
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_set_timeout
|
||||
SSL_get_time, SSL_set_time, SSL_get_timeout, SSL_set_timeout,
|
||||
- retrieve and manipulate session time and timeout settings
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -41,7 +46,7 @@ functions are synonyms for the SSL_SESSION_*() counterparts.
|
||||
Sessions are expired by examining the creation time and the timeout value.
|
||||
Both are set at creation time of the session to the actual time and the
|
||||
default timeout value at creation, respectively, as set by
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)|SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>.
|
||||
Using these functions it is possible to extend or shorten the lifetime
|
||||
of the session.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -52,13 +57,22 @@ valid values.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION_set_time() and SSL_SESSION_set_timeout() return 1 on success.
|
||||
|
||||
If any of the function is passed the NULL pointer for the session B<s>,
|
||||
If any of the function is passed the NULL pointer for the session B<s>,
|
||||
0 is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)|SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)|SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_accept - wait for a TLS/SSL client to initiate a TLS/SSL handshake
|
||||
@@ -18,7 +20,7 @@ B<ssl> by setting an underlying B<BIO>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_accept() depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_accept() depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_accept() will only return once the
|
||||
handshake has been finished or an error occurred.
|
||||
@@ -64,10 +66,19 @@ to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)|SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_alert_type_string, SSL_alert_type_string_long, SSL_alert_desc_string, SSL_alert_desc_string_long - get textual description of alert information
|
||||
@@ -217,7 +219,7 @@ point. This message is always a warning.
|
||||
=item "UP"/"unknown PSK identity"
|
||||
|
||||
Sent by the server to indicate that it does not recognize a PSK
|
||||
identity or an SRP identity.
|
||||
identity or an SRP identity.
|
||||
|
||||
=item "UK"/"unknown"
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -228,6 +230,15 @@ Probably B<value> does not contain a correct alert message.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_check_chain - check certificate chain suitability
|
||||
@@ -79,7 +81,16 @@ for earlier versions of TLS or DTLS.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_cert_cb(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2015-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_clear - reset SSL object to allow another connection
|
||||
@@ -21,8 +23,8 @@ SSL_clear is used to prepare an SSL object for a new connection. While all
|
||||
settings are kept, a side effect is the handling of the current SSL session.
|
||||
If a session is still B<open>, it is considered bad and will be removed
|
||||
from the session cache, as required by RFC2246. A session is considered open,
|
||||
if L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)> was not called for the connection
|
||||
or at least L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)> was used to
|
||||
if L<SSL_shutdown(3)> was not called for the connection
|
||||
or at least L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)> was used to
|
||||
set the SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN state.
|
||||
|
||||
If a session was closed cleanly, the session object will be kept and all
|
||||
@@ -30,8 +32,8 @@ settings corresponding. This explicitly means, that e.g. the special method
|
||||
used during the session will be kept for the next handshake. So if the
|
||||
session was a TLSv1 session, a SSL client object will use a TLSv1 client
|
||||
method for the next handshake and a SSL server object will use a TLSv1
|
||||
server method, even if SSLv23_*_methods were chosen on startup. This
|
||||
will might lead to connection failures (see L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>)
|
||||
server method, even if TLS_*_methods were chosen on startup. This
|
||||
will might lead to connection failures (see L<SSL_new(3)>)
|
||||
for a description of the method's properties.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNINGS
|
||||
@@ -42,12 +44,12 @@ reset operation however keeps several settings of the last sessions
|
||||
handshake). It only makes sense for a new connection with the exact
|
||||
same peer that shares these settings, and may fail if that peer
|
||||
changes its settings between connections. Use the sequence
|
||||
L<SSL_get_session(3)|SSL_get_session(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_session(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_set_session(3)>;
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
instead to avoid such failures
|
||||
(or simply L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>; L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
(or simply L<SSL_free(3)>; L<SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
if session reuse is not desired).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
@@ -67,9 +69,18 @@ The SSL_clear() operation was successful.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)|SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>, L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_connect - initiate the TLS/SSL handshake with an TLS/SSL server
|
||||
@@ -18,7 +20,7 @@ underlying B<BIO>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_connect() depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_connect() depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_connect() will only return once the
|
||||
handshake has been finished or an error occurred.
|
||||
@@ -64,10 +66,19 @@ to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)|SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_do_handshake - perform a TLS/SSL handshake
|
||||
@@ -15,8 +17,8 @@ SSL_do_handshake - perform a TLS/SSL handshake
|
||||
SSL_do_handshake() will wait for a SSL/TLS handshake to take place. If the
|
||||
connection is in client mode, the handshake will be started. The handshake
|
||||
routines may have to be explicitly set in advance using either
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_set_accept_state(3)|SSL_set_accept_state(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_set_accept_state(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -65,8 +67,17 @@ to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)>, L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2002-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_export_keying_material - obtain keying material for application use
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_export_keying_material(SSL *s, unsigned char *out, size_t olen,
|
||||
const char *label, size_t llen,
|
||||
const unsigned char *context,
|
||||
size_t contextlen, int use_context);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
During the creation of a TLS or DTLS connection shared keying material is
|
||||
established between the two endpoints. The function SSL_export_keying_material()
|
||||
enables an application to use some of this keying material for its own purposes
|
||||
in accordance with RFC5705.
|
||||
|
||||
An application may need to securely establish the context within which this
|
||||
keying material will be used. For example this may include identifiers for the
|
||||
application session, application algorithms or parameters, or the lifetime of
|
||||
the context. The context value is left to the application but must be the same
|
||||
on both sides of the communication.
|
||||
|
||||
For a given SSL connection B<s>, B<olen> bytes of data will be written to
|
||||
B<out>. The application specific context should be supplied in the location
|
||||
pointed to by B<context> and should be B<contextlen> bytes long. Provision of
|
||||
a context is optional. If the context should be omitted entirely then
|
||||
B<use_context> should be set to 0. Otherwise it should be any other value. If
|
||||
B<use_context> is 0 then the values of B<context> and B<contextlen> are ignored.
|
||||
Note that a zero length context is treated differently to no context at all, and
|
||||
will result in different keying material being returned.
|
||||
|
||||
An application specific label should be provided in the location pointed to by
|
||||
B<label> and should be B<llen> bytes long. Typically this will be a value from
|
||||
the IANA Exporter Label Registry
|
||||
(L<https://www.iana.org/assignments/tls-parameters/tls-parameters.xhtml#exporter-labels>).
|
||||
Alternatively labels beginning with "EXPERIMENTAL" are permitted by the standard
|
||||
to be used without registration.
|
||||
|
||||
Note that this function is only defined for TLSv1.0 and above, and DTLSv1.0 and
|
||||
above. Attempting to use it in SSLv3 will result in an error.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_export_keying_material() returns 0 or -1 on failure or 1 on success.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2017 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_free - free an allocated SSL structure
|
||||
@@ -15,6 +17,7 @@ SSL_free - free an allocated SSL structure
|
||||
SSL_free() decrements the reference count of B<ssl>, and removes the SSL
|
||||
structure pointed to by B<ssl> and frees up the allocated memory if the
|
||||
reference count has reached 0.
|
||||
If B<ssl> is NULL nothing is done.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -28,8 +31,8 @@ failure.
|
||||
The ssl session has reference counts from two users: the SSL object, for
|
||||
which the reference count is removed by SSL_free() and the internal
|
||||
session cache. If the session is considered bad, because
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)> was not called for the connection
|
||||
and L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)> was not used to set the
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)> was not called for the connection
|
||||
and L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)> was not used to set the
|
||||
SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN state, the session will also be removed
|
||||
from the session cache as required by RFC2246.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -37,8 +40,17 @@ from the session cache as required by RFC2246.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_free() does not provide diagnostic information.
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_SSL_CTX - get the SSL_CTX from which an SSL is created
|
||||
@@ -13,7 +15,7 @@ SSL_get_SSL_CTX - get the SSL_CTX from which an SSL is created
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_SSL_CTX() returns a pointer to the SSL_CTX object, from which
|
||||
B<ssl> was created with L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>.
|
||||
B<ssl> was created with L<SSL_new(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -21,6 +23,15 @@ The pointer to the SSL_CTX object is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,14 +1,21 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ciphers, SSL_get_cipher_list - get list of available SSL_CIPHERs
|
||||
SSL_get1_supported_ciphers, SSL_get_client_ciphers,
|
||||
SSL_get_ciphers, SSL_CTX_get_ciphers, SSL_get_cipher_list
|
||||
- get list of available SSL_CIPHERs
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
STACK_OF(SSL_CIPHER) *SSL_get_ciphers(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
STACK_OF(SSL_CIPHER) *SSL_CTX_get_ciphers(const SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
STACK_OF(SSL_CIPHER) *SSL_get1_supported_ciphers(SSL *s);
|
||||
STACK_OF(SSL_CIPHER) *SSL_get_client_ciphers(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_cipher_list(const SSL *ssl, int priority);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
@@ -17,6 +24,25 @@ SSL_get_ciphers() returns the stack of available SSL_CIPHERs for B<ssl>,
|
||||
sorted by preference. If B<ssl> is NULL or no ciphers are available, NULL
|
||||
is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_ciphers() returns the stack of available SSL_CIPHERs for B<ctx>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get1_supported_ciphers() returns the stack of enabled SSL_CIPHERs for
|
||||
B<ssl>, sorted by preference.
|
||||
The list depends on settings like the cipher list, the supported protocol
|
||||
versions, the security level, and the enabled signature algorithms.
|
||||
SRP and PSK ciphers are only enabled if the appropriate callbacks or settings
|
||||
have been applied.
|
||||
This is the list that will be sent by the client to the server.
|
||||
The list supported by the server might include more ciphers in case there is a
|
||||
hole in the list of supported protocols.
|
||||
The server will also not use ciphers from this list depending on the
|
||||
configured certificates and DH parameters.
|
||||
If B<ssl> is NULL or no ciphers are available, NULL is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_client_ciphers() returns the stack of available SSL_CIPHERs matching the
|
||||
list received from the client on B<ssl>. If B<ssl> is NULL, no ciphers are
|
||||
available, or B<ssl> is not operating in server mode, NULL is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher_list() returns a pointer to the name of the SSL_CIPHER
|
||||
listed for B<ssl> with B<priority>. If B<ssl> is NULL, no ciphers are
|
||||
available, or there are less ciphers than B<priority> available, NULL
|
||||
@@ -24,19 +50,37 @@ is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The details of the ciphers obtained by SSL_get_ciphers() can be obtained using
|
||||
the L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)|SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
The details of the ciphers obtained by SSL_get_ciphers(), SSL_CTX_get_ciphers()
|
||||
SSL_get1_supported_ciphers() and SSL_get_client_ciphers() can be obtained using
|
||||
the L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)> family of functions.
|
||||
|
||||
Call SSL_get_cipher_list() with B<priority> starting from 0 to obtain the
|
||||
sorted list of available ciphers, until NULL is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
Note: SSL_get_ciphers(), SSL_CTX_get_ciphers() and SSL_get_client_ciphers()
|
||||
return a pointer to an internal cipher stack, which will be freed later on when
|
||||
the SSL or SSL_SESSION object is freed. Therefore, the calling code B<MUST NOT>
|
||||
free the return value itself.
|
||||
|
||||
The stack returned by SSL_get1_supported_ciphers() should be freed using
|
||||
sk_SSL_CIPHER_free().
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
See DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)|SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_client_CA_list, SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list - get list of client CAs
|
||||
@@ -9,16 +11,16 @@ SSL_get_client_CA_list, SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list - get list of client CAs
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *SSL_get_client_CA_list(const SSL *s);
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list(const SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list(const SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CTX_get_client_CA_list() returns the list of client CAs explicitly set for
|
||||
B<ctx> using L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>.
|
||||
B<ctx> using L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_client_CA_list() returns the list of client CAs explicitly
|
||||
set for B<ssl> using SSL_set_client_CA_list() or B<ssl>'s SSL_CTX object with
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>, when in
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>, when in
|
||||
server mode. In client mode, SSL_get_client_CA_list returns the list of
|
||||
client CAs sent from the server, if any.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -46,8 +48,17 @@ the server did not send a list of CAs (client mode).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_current_cipher, SSL_get_cipher, SSL_get_cipher_name,
|
||||
SSL_get_current_cipher, SSL_get_cipher_name, SSL_get_cipher,
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher_bits, SSL_get_cipher_version - get SSL_CIPHER of a connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
@@ -10,34 +12,46 @@ SSL_get_cipher_bits, SSL_get_cipher_version - get SSL_CIPHER of a connection
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER *SSL_get_current_cipher(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
#define SSL_get_cipher(s) \
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_name(SSL_get_current_cipher(s))
|
||||
#define SSL_get_cipher_name(s) \
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_name(SSL_get_current_cipher(s))
|
||||
#define SSL_get_cipher_bits(s,np) \
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_bits(SSL_get_current_cipher(s),np)
|
||||
#define SSL_get_cipher_version(s) \
|
||||
SSL_CIPHER_get_version(SSL_get_current_cipher(s))
|
||||
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_cipher_name(const SSL *s);
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_cipher(const SSL *s);
|
||||
int SSL_get_cipher_bits(const SSL *s, int *np) \
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_cipher_version(const SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_current_cipher() returns a pointer to an SSL_CIPHER object containing
|
||||
the description of the actually used cipher of a connection established with
|
||||
the B<ssl> object.
|
||||
See L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)> for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher() and SSL_get_cipher_name() are identical macros to obtain the
|
||||
name of the currently used cipher. SSL_get_cipher_bits() is a
|
||||
macro to obtain the number of secret/algorithm bits used and
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher_name() obtains the
|
||||
name of the currently used cipher.
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher() is identical to SSL_get_cipher_name().
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher_bits() is a
|
||||
macro to obtain the number of secret/algorithm bits used and
|
||||
SSL_get_cipher_version() returns the protocol name.
|
||||
See L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)|SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)> for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_current_cipher() returns the cipher actually used or NULL, when
|
||||
SSL_get_current_cipher() returns the cipher actually used, or NULL if
|
||||
no session has been established.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
These are implemented as macros.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)|SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CIPHER_get_name(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_default_timeout - get default session timeout value
|
||||
@@ -20,11 +22,11 @@ SSL_SESSION objects negotiated for the protocol valid for B<ssl>.
|
||||
Whenever a new session is negotiated, it is assigned a timeout value,
|
||||
after which it will not be accepted for session reuse. If the timeout
|
||||
value was not explicitly set using
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)|SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>, the hardcoded default
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_timeout(3)>, the hardcoded default
|
||||
timeout for the protocol will be used.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_default_timeout() return this hardcoded value, which is 300 seconds
|
||||
for all currently supported protocols (SSLv2, SSLv3, and TLSv1).
|
||||
for all currently supported protocols.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -32,10 +34,19 @@ See description.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)|SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)|SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_get_time(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_default_timeout(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_error - obtain result code for TLS/SSL I/O operation
|
||||
@@ -88,6 +90,28 @@ SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb() has asked to be called again.
|
||||
The TLS/SSL I/O function should be called again later.
|
||||
Details depend on the application.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC
|
||||
|
||||
The operation did not complete because an asynchronous engine is still
|
||||
processing data. This will only occur if the mode has been set to SSL_MODE_ASYNC
|
||||
using L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> or L<SSL_set_mode(3)> and an asynchronous capable
|
||||
engine is being used. An application can determine whether the engine has
|
||||
completed its processing using select() or poll() on the asynchronous wait file
|
||||
descriptor. This file descriptor is available by calling
|
||||
L<SSL_get_all_async_fds(3)> or L<SSL_get_changed_async_fds(3)>. The TLS/SSL I/O
|
||||
function should be called again later. The function B<must> be called from the
|
||||
same thread that the original call was made from.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC_JOB
|
||||
|
||||
The asynchronous job could not be started because there were no async jobs
|
||||
available in the pool (see ASYNC_init_thread(3)). This will only occur if the
|
||||
mode has been set to SSL_MODE_ASYNC using L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_set_mode(3)> and a maximum limit has been set on the async job pool
|
||||
through a call to L<ASYNC_init_thread(3)>. The application should retry the
|
||||
operation after a currently executing asynchronous operation for the current
|
||||
thread has completed.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_ERROR_SYSCALL
|
||||
|
||||
Some non-recoverable I/O error occurred.
|
||||
@@ -103,10 +127,19 @@ OpenSSL error queue contains more information on the error.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<err(3)|err(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<err(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_error() was added in SSLeay 0.8.
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,61 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx - get ex_data index to access SSL structure
|
||||
from X509_STORE_CTX
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(void);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx() returns the index number under which
|
||||
the pointer to the SSL object is stored into the X509_STORE_CTX object.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
Whenever a X509_STORE_CTX object is created for the verification of the
|
||||
peers certificate during a handshake, a pointer to the SSL object is
|
||||
stored into the X509_STORE_CTX object to identify the connection affected.
|
||||
To retrieve this pointer the X509_STORE_CTX_get_ex_data() function can
|
||||
be used with the correct index. This index is globally the same for all
|
||||
X509_STORE_CTX objects and can be retrieved using
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx(). The index value is set when
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx() is first called either by the application
|
||||
program directly or indirectly during other SSL setup functions or during
|
||||
the handshake.
|
||||
|
||||
The value depends on other index values defined for X509_STORE_CTX objects
|
||||
before the SSL index is created.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
=item E<gt>=0
|
||||
|
||||
The index value to access the pointer.
|
||||
|
||||
=item E<lt>0
|
||||
|
||||
An error occurred, check the error stack for a detailed error message.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
The index returned from SSL_get_ex_data_X509_STORE_CTX_idx() allows to
|
||||
access the SSL object for the connection to be accessed during the
|
||||
verify_callback() when checking the peers certificate. Please check
|
||||
the example in L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>,
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>,
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_new_index, SSL_set_ex_data, SSL_get_ex_data - internal application specific data functions
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_get_ex_new_index(long argl, void *argp,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_new *new_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_dup *dup_func,
|
||||
CRYPTO_EX_free *free_func);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_set_ex_data(SSL *ssl, int idx, void *arg);
|
||||
|
||||
void *SSL_get_ex_data(const SSL *ssl, int idx);
|
||||
|
||||
typedef int new_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef void free_func(void *parent, void *ptr, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *ad,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
typedef int dup_func(CRYPTO_EX_DATA *to, CRYPTO_EX_DATA *from, void *from_d,
|
||||
int idx, long argl, void *argp);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
Several OpenSSL structures can have application specific data attached to them.
|
||||
These functions are used internally by OpenSSL to manipulate application
|
||||
specific data attached to a specific structure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_new_index() is used to register a new index for application
|
||||
specific data.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_ex_data() is used to store application data at B<arg> for B<idx> into
|
||||
the B<ssl> object.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_ex_data() is used to retrieve the information for B<idx> from
|
||||
B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
A detailed description for the B<*_get_ex_new_index()> functionality
|
||||
can be found in L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>.
|
||||
The B<*_get_ex_data()> and B<*_set_ex_data()> functionality is described in
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
An example on how to use the functionality is included in the example
|
||||
verify_callback() in L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)|RSA_get_ex_new_index(3)>,
|
||||
L<CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)|CRYPTO_set_ex_data(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_fd - get file descriptor linked to an SSL object
|
||||
SSL_get_fd, SSL_get_rfd, SSL_get_wfd - get file descriptor linked to an SSL object
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -39,6 +41,15 @@ The file descriptor linked to B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_set_fd(3)|SSL_set_fd(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_fd(3)>, L<ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,32 +1,49 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_peer_cert_chain - get the X509 certificate chain of the peer
|
||||
SSL_get_peer_cert_chain, SSL_get0_verified_chain - get the X509 certificate
|
||||
chain of the peer
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509) *SSL_get_peer_cert_chain(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509) *SSL_get0_verified_chain(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_peer_cert_chain() returns a pointer to STACK_OF(X509) certificates
|
||||
forming the certificate chain of the peer. If called on the client side,
|
||||
forming the certificate chain sent by the peer. If called on the client side,
|
||||
the stack also contains the peer's certificate; if called on the server
|
||||
side, the peer's certificate must be obtained separately using
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
If the peer did not present a certificate, NULL is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
NB: SSL_get_peer_cert_chain() returns the peer chain as sent by the peer: it
|
||||
only consists of certificates the peer has sent (in the order the peer
|
||||
has sent them) it is B<not> a verified chain.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get0_verified_chain() returns the B<verified> certificate chain
|
||||
of the peer including the peer's end entity certificate. It must be called
|
||||
after a session has been successfully established. If peer verification was
|
||||
not successful (as indicated by SSL_get_verify_result() not returning
|
||||
X509_V_OK) the chain may be incomplete or invalid.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
The peer certificate chain is not necessarily available after reusing
|
||||
a session, in which case a NULL pointer is returned.
|
||||
If the session is resumed peers do not send certificates so a NULL pointer
|
||||
is returned by these functions. Applications can call SSL_session_reused()
|
||||
to determine whether a session is resumed.
|
||||
|
||||
The reference count of the STACK_OF(X509) object is not incremented.
|
||||
If the corresponding session is freed, the pointer must not be used
|
||||
any longer.
|
||||
The reference count of each certificate in the returned STACK_OF(X509) object
|
||||
is not incremented and the returned stack may be invalidated by renegotiation.
|
||||
If applications wish to use any certificates in the returned chain
|
||||
indefinitely they must increase the reference counts using X509_up_ref() or
|
||||
obtain a copy of the whole chain with X509_chain_up_ref().
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -47,6 +64,16 @@ The return value points to the certificate chain presented by the peer.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>, L<X509_up_ref(3)>,
|
||||
L<X509_chain_up_ref(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_peer_certificate - get the X509 certificate of the peer
|
||||
@@ -20,11 +22,11 @@ peer presented. If the peer did not present a certificate, NULL is returned.
|
||||
Due to the protocol definition, a TLS/SSL server will always send a
|
||||
certificate, if present. A client will only send a certificate when
|
||||
explicitly requested to do so by the server (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>). If an anonymous cipher
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>). If an anonymous cipher
|
||||
is used, no certificates are sent.
|
||||
|
||||
That a certificate is returned does not indicate information about the
|
||||
verification state, use L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)>
|
||||
verification state, use L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)>
|
||||
to check the verification state.
|
||||
|
||||
The reference count of the X509 object is incremented by one, so that it
|
||||
@@ -49,7 +51,16 @@ The return value points to the certificate presented by the peer.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)|SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_verify(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,39 +1,11 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=begin comment
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
The portions of the attached software ("Contribution") is developed by
|
||||
Nokia Corporation and is licensed pursuant to the OpenSSL open source
|
||||
license.
|
||||
|
||||
The Contribution, originally written by Mika Kousa and Pasi Eronen of
|
||||
Nokia Corporation, consists of the "PSK" (Pre-Shared Key) ciphersuites
|
||||
support (see RFC 4279) to OpenSSL.
|
||||
|
||||
No patent licenses or other rights except those expressly stated in
|
||||
the OpenSSL open source license shall be deemed granted or received
|
||||
expressly, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
No assurances are provided by Nokia that the Contribution does not
|
||||
infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any third
|
||||
party or that the license provides you with all the necessary rights
|
||||
to make use of the Contribution.
|
||||
|
||||
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. IN
|
||||
ADDITION TO THE DISCLAIMERS INCLUDED IN THE LICENSE, NOKIA
|
||||
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY YOU OR ANY
|
||||
OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR
|
||||
OTHERWISE.
|
||||
|
||||
=end comment
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_psk_identity, SSL_get_psk_identity_hint - get PSK client identity and hint
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
@@ -60,4 +32,15 @@ no PSK identity hint was used during the connection setup.
|
||||
Note that the return value is valid only during the lifetime of the
|
||||
SSL object B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2006-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2005 Nokia.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_rbio - get BIO linked to an SSL object
|
||||
SSL_get_rbio, SSL_get_wbio - get BIO linked to an SSL object
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -35,6 +37,15 @@ The BIO linked to B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_set_bio(3)|SSL_set_bio(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_bio(3)>, L<ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_session - retrieve TLS/SSL session data
|
||||
SSL_get_session, SSL_get0_session, SSL_get1_session - retrieve TLS/SSL session data
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -30,16 +32,16 @@ connection without a new handshake.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get0_session() returns a pointer to the actual session. As the
|
||||
reference counter is not incremented, the pointer is only valid while
|
||||
the connection is in use. If L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)> is called, the session may be removed completely
|
||||
the connection is in use. If L<SSL_clear(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)> is called, the session may be removed completely
|
||||
(if considered bad), and the pointer obtained will become invalid. Even
|
||||
if the session is valid, it can be removed at any time due to timeout
|
||||
during L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)|SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>.
|
||||
during L<SSL_CTX_flush_sessions(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
If the data is to be kept, SSL_get1_session() will increment the reference
|
||||
count, so that the session will not be implicitly removed by other operations
|
||||
but stays in memory. In order to remove the session
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)> must be explicitly called once
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)> must be explicitly called once
|
||||
to decrement the reference count again.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_SESSION objects keep internal link information about the session cache
|
||||
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ The following return values can occur:
|
||||
|
||||
There is no session available in B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Pointer to an SSL
|
||||
=item Pointer to an SSL_SESSION
|
||||
|
||||
The return value points to the data of an SSL session.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -66,8 +68,17 @@ The return value points to the data of an SSL session.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_verify_result - get result of peer certificate verification
|
||||
@@ -30,7 +32,7 @@ when a session is reused.
|
||||
If no peer certificate was presented, the returned result code is
|
||||
X509_V_OK. This is because no verification error occurred, it does however
|
||||
not indicate success. SSL_get_verify_result() is only useful in connection
|
||||
with L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
with L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -44,14 +46,23 @@ The verification succeeded or no peer certificate was presented.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Any other value
|
||||
|
||||
Documented in L<verify(1)|verify(1)>.
|
||||
Documented in L<verify(1)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_verify_result(3)|SSL_set_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<verify(1)|verify(1)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<verify(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_version - get the protocol version of a connection.
|
||||
SSL_get_version, SSL_is_dtls - get the protocol information of a connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -10,21 +12,21 @@ SSL_get_version - get the protocol version of a connection.
|
||||
|
||||
const char *SSL_get_version(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_is_dtls(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_get_version() returns the name of the protocol used for the
|
||||
connection B<ssl>.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_is_dtls() returns one if the connection is using DTLS, zero if not.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
The following strings can be returned:
|
||||
SSL_get_version() returns one of the following strings:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSLv2
|
||||
|
||||
The connection uses the SSLv2 protocol.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSLv3
|
||||
|
||||
The connection uses the SSLv3 protocol.
|
||||
@@ -49,6 +51,19 @@ This indicates that no version has been set (no connection established).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_is_dtls() was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_library_init, OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms, SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms
|
||||
SSL_library_init, OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms,
|
||||
- initialize SSL library by registering algorithms
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
@@ -10,48 +12,48 @@ SSL_library_init, OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms, SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_library_init(void);
|
||||
#define OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms() SSL_library_init()
|
||||
#define SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms() SSL_library_init()
|
||||
|
||||
int OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms(void);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_library_init() registers the available SSL/TLS ciphers and digests.
|
||||
|
||||
OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms() and SSLeay_add_ssl_algorithms() are synonyms
|
||||
for SSL_library_init().
|
||||
OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms() is a synonym for SSL_library_init() and is
|
||||
implemented as a macro.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_library_init() must be called before any other action takes place.
|
||||
SSL_library_init() is not reentrant.
|
||||
SSL_library_init() is not reentrant.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 WARNING
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_library_init() adds ciphers and digests used directly and indirectly by
|
||||
SSL/TLS.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
|
||||
A typical TLS/SSL application will start with the library initialization,
|
||||
and provide readable error messages.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_load_error_strings(); /* readable error messages */
|
||||
SSL_library_init(); /* initialize library */
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_library_init() always returns "1", so it is safe to discard the return
|
||||
value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
OpenSSL 0.9.8o and 1.0.0a and later added SHA2 algorithms to SSL_library_init().
|
||||
Applications which need to use SHA2 in earlier versions of OpenSSL should call
|
||||
OpenSSL_add_all_algorithms() as well.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_load_error_strings(3)|SSL_load_error_strings(3)>,
|
||||
L<RAND_add(3)|RAND_add(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<RAND_add(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL_library_init() and OpenSSL_add_ssl_algorithms() functions were
|
||||
deprecated in OpenSSL 1.1.0 by OPENSSL_init_ssl().
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_load_client_CA_file - load certificate names from file
|
||||
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ a STACK_OF(X509_NAME) with the subject names found.
|
||||
SSL_load_client_CA_file() reads a file of PEM formatted certificates and
|
||||
extracts the X509_NAMES of the certificates found. While the name suggests
|
||||
the specific usage as support function for
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>,
|
||||
it is not limited to CA certificates.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 EXAMPLES
|
||||
@@ -30,7 +32,7 @@ Load names of CAs from file and use it as a client CA list:
|
||||
SSL_CTX *ctx;
|
||||
STACK_OF(X509_NAME) *cert_names;
|
||||
|
||||
...
|
||||
...
|
||||
cert_names = SSL_load_client_CA_file("/path/to/CAfile.pem");
|
||||
if (cert_names != NULL)
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(ctx, cert_names);
|
||||
@@ -56,7 +58,16 @@ Pointer to the subject names of the successfully read certificates.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)|SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_client_CA_list(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,21 +1,29 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_new - create a new SSL structure for a connection
|
||||
SSL_new, SSL_up_ref - create a new SSL structure for a connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
SSL *SSL_new(SSL_CTX *ctx);
|
||||
int SSL_up_ref(SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_new() creates a new B<SSL> structure which is needed to hold the
|
||||
data for a TLS/SSL connection. The new structure inherits the settings
|
||||
of the underlying context B<ctx>: connection method (SSLv2/v3/TLSv1),
|
||||
options, verification settings, timeout settings.
|
||||
of the underlying context B<ctx>: connection method,
|
||||
options, verification settings, timeout settings. An B<SSL> structure is
|
||||
reference counted. Creating an B<SSL> structure for the first time increments
|
||||
the reference count. Freeing it (using SSL_free) decrements it. When the
|
||||
reference count drops to zero, any memory or resources allocated to the B<SSL>
|
||||
structure are freed. SSL_up_ref() increments the reference count for an
|
||||
existing B<SSL> structure.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -32,13 +40,24 @@ find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
The return value points to an allocated SSL structure.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_up_ref() returns 1 for success and 0 for failure.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)|SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_SSL_CTX(3)|SSL_get_SSL_CTX(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_free(3)>, L<SSL_clear(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_options(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_SSL_CTX(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,45 +1,70 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_pending - obtain number of readable bytes buffered in an SSL object
|
||||
SSL_pending, SSL_has_pending - check for readable bytes buffered in an
|
||||
SSL object
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
int SSL_pending(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
int SSL_has_pending(const SSL *s);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_pending() returns the number of bytes which are available inside
|
||||
B<ssl> for immediate read.
|
||||
Data is received in whole blocks known as records from the peer. A whole record
|
||||
is processed (e.g. decrypted) in one go and is buffered by OpenSSL until it is
|
||||
read by the application via a call to L<SSL_read(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
SSL_pending() returns the number of bytes which have been processed, buffered
|
||||
and are available inside B<ssl> for immediate read.
|
||||
|
||||
Data are received in blocks from the peer. Therefore data can be buffered
|
||||
inside B<ssl> and are ready for immediate retrieval with
|
||||
L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>.
|
||||
If the B<SSL> object's I<read_ahead> flag is set (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)>), additional protocol bytes (beyond the current
|
||||
record) may have been read containing more TLS/SSL records. This also applies to
|
||||
DTLS and pipelining (see L<SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment(3)>). These
|
||||
additional bytes will be buffered by OpenSSL but will remain unprocessed until
|
||||
they are needed. As these bytes are still in an unprocessed state SSL_pending()
|
||||
will ignore them. Therefore it is possible for no more bytes to be readable from
|
||||
the underlying BIO (because OpenSSL has already read them) and for SSL_pending()
|
||||
to return 0, even though readable application data bytes are available (because
|
||||
the data is in unprocessed buffered records).
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_has_pending() returns 1 if B<s> has buffered data (whether processed or
|
||||
unprocessed) and 0 otherwise. Note that it is possible for SSL_has_pending() to
|
||||
return 1, and then a subsequent call to SSL_read() to return no data because the
|
||||
unprocessed buffered data when processed yielded no application data (for
|
||||
example this can happen during renegotiation). It is also possible in this
|
||||
scenario for SSL_has_pending() to continue to return 1 even after an SSL_read()
|
||||
call because the buffered and unprocessed data is not yet processable (e.g.
|
||||
because OpenSSL has only received a partial record so far).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
The number of bytes pending is returned.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 BUGS
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_pending() takes into account only bytes from the TLS/SSL record
|
||||
that is currently being processed (if any). If the B<SSL> object's
|
||||
I<read_ahead> flag is set (see
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)|SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)>), additional protocol
|
||||
bytes may have been read containing more TLS/SSL records; these are ignored by
|
||||
SSL_pending().
|
||||
|
||||
Up to OpenSSL 0.9.6, SSL_pending() does not check if the record type
|
||||
of pending data is application data.
|
||||
SSL_pending() returns the number of buffered and processed application data
|
||||
bytes that are pending and are available for immediate read. SSL_has_pending()
|
||||
returns 1 if there is buffered record data in the SSL object and 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)|SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_read(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_read_ahead(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_split_send_fragment(3)>, L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL_has_pending() function was added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_read - read bytes from a TLS/SSL connection.
|
||||
SSL_read - read bytes from a TLS/SSL connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -18,16 +20,16 @@ buffer B<buf>.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
If necessary, SSL_read() will negotiate a TLS/SSL session, if
|
||||
not already explicitly performed by L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>. If the
|
||||
not already explicitly performed by L<SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)>. If the
|
||||
peer requests a re-negotiation, it will be performed transparently during
|
||||
the SSL_read() operation. The behaviour of SSL_read() depends on the
|
||||
underlying BIO.
|
||||
underlying BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
For the transparent negotiation to succeed, the B<ssl> must have been
|
||||
initialized to client or server mode. This is being done by calling
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or SSL_set_accept_state()
|
||||
before the first call to an SSL_read() or L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or SSL_set_accept_state()
|
||||
before the first call to an SSL_read() or L<SSL_write(3)>
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_read() works based on the SSL/TLS records. The data are received in
|
||||
@@ -47,14 +49,14 @@ record is complete and SSL_read() can succeed.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_read() will only return, once the
|
||||
read operation has been finished or an error occurred, except when a
|
||||
renegotiation take place, in which case a SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ may occur.
|
||||
renegotiation take place, in which case a SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ may occur.
|
||||
This behaviour can be controlled with the SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY flag of the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> call.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> call.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_read() will also return
|
||||
when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_read()
|
||||
to continue the operation. In this case a call to
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> with the
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the
|
||||
return value of SSL_read() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
|
||||
B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. As at any time a re-negotiation is possible, a
|
||||
call to SSL_read() can also cause write operations! The calling process
|
||||
@@ -64,7 +66,7 @@ non-blocking socket, nothing is to be done, but select() can be used to check
|
||||
for the required condition. When using a buffering BIO, like a BIO pair, data
|
||||
must be written into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_pending(3)|SSL_pending(3)> can be used to find out whether there
|
||||
L<SSL_pending(3)> can be used to find out whether there
|
||||
are buffered bytes available for immediate retrieval. In this case
|
||||
SSL_read() can be called without blocking or actually receiving new
|
||||
data from the underlying socket.
|
||||
@@ -89,18 +91,10 @@ connection.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<><= 0
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
=item E<lt>0
|
||||
|
||||
The read operation was not successful, because either the connection was closed,
|
||||
an error occurred or action must be taken by the calling process.
|
||||
Call L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the return value B<ret> to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
SSLv2 (deprecated) does not support a shutdown alert protocol, so it can
|
||||
only be detected, whether the underlying connection was closed. It cannot
|
||||
be checked, whether the closure was initiated by the peer or by something
|
||||
else.
|
||||
|
||||
Old documentation indicated a difference between 0 and -1, and that -1 was
|
||||
retryable.
|
||||
You should instead call SSL_get_error() to find out if it's retryable.
|
||||
@@ -109,12 +103,21 @@ You should instead call SSL_get_error() to find out if it's retryable.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_pending(3)|SSL_pending(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_write(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_pending(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_rstate_string, SSL_rstate_string_long - get textual description of state of an SSL object during read operation
|
||||
@@ -54,6 +56,15 @@ The read state is unknown. This should never happen.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_session_reused - query whether a reused session was negotiated during handshake
|
||||
@@ -39,7 +41,16 @@ A session was reused.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)|SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_set_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,34 +1,110 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_bio - connect the SSL object with a BIO
|
||||
SSL_set_bio, SSL_set0_rbio, SSL_set0_wbio - connect the SSL object with a BIO
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
#include <openssl/ssl.h>
|
||||
|
||||
void SSL_set_bio(SSL *ssl, BIO *rbio, BIO *wbio);
|
||||
void SSL_set0_rbio(SSL *s, BIO *rbio);
|
||||
void SSL_set0_wbio(SSL *s, BIO *wbio);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_bio() connects the BIOs B<rbio> and B<wbio> for the read and write
|
||||
operations of the TLS/SSL (encrypted) side of B<ssl>.
|
||||
SSL_set0_rbio() connects the BIO B<rbio> for the read operations of the B<ssl>
|
||||
object. The SSL engine inherits the behaviour of B<rbio>. If the BIO is
|
||||
non-blocking then the B<ssl> object will also have non-blocking behaviour. This
|
||||
function transfers ownership of B<rbio> to B<ssl>. It will be automatically
|
||||
freed using L<BIO_free_all(3)> when the B<ssl> is freed. On calling this
|
||||
function, any existing B<rbio> that was previously set will also be freed via a
|
||||
call to L<BIO_free_all(3)> (this includes the case where the B<rbio> is set to
|
||||
the same value as previously).
|
||||
|
||||
The SSL engine inherits the behaviour of B<rbio> and B<wbio>, respectively.
|
||||
If a BIO is non-blocking, the B<ssl> will also have non-blocking behaviour.
|
||||
SSL_set0_wbio() works in the same as SSL_set0_rbio() except that it connects
|
||||
the BIO B<wbio> for the write operations of the B<ssl> object. Note that if the
|
||||
rbio and wbio are the same then SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() each take
|
||||
ownership of one reference. Therefore it may be necessary to increment the
|
||||
number of references available using L<BIO_up_ref(3)> before calling the set0
|
||||
functions.
|
||||
|
||||
If there was already a BIO connected to B<ssl>, BIO_free() will be called
|
||||
(for both the reading and writing side, if different).
|
||||
SSL_set_bio() does a similar job as SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() except
|
||||
that it connects both the B<rbio> and the B<wbio> at the same time. This
|
||||
function transfers the ownership of B<rbio> and B<wbio> to B<ssl> except that
|
||||
the rules for this are much more complex. For this reason this function is
|
||||
considered a legacy function and SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() should be
|
||||
used in preference. The ownership rules are as follows:
|
||||
|
||||
=over 4
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If neither the rbio or wbio have changed from their previous values then nothing
|
||||
is done.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are different and both are different to their
|
||||
previously set values then one reference is consumed for the rbio and one
|
||||
reference is consumed for the wbio.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are the same and the rbio is not the same as the
|
||||
previously set value then one reference is consumed.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are the same and the rbio is the same as the
|
||||
previously set value, then no additional references are consumed.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are different and the rbio is the same as the
|
||||
previously set value then one reference is consumbed for the wbio and no
|
||||
references are consumed for the rbio.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are different and the wbio is the same as the
|
||||
previously set value and the old rbio and wbio values were the same as each
|
||||
other then one reference is consumed for the rbio and no references are consumed
|
||||
for the wbio.
|
||||
|
||||
=item
|
||||
|
||||
If the rbio and wbio parameters are different and the wbio is the same as the
|
||||
previously set value and the old rbio and wbio values were different to each
|
||||
other then one reference is consumed for the rbio and one reference is consumed
|
||||
for the wbio.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_bio() cannot fail.
|
||||
SSL_set_bio(), SSL_set_rbio() and SSL_set_wbio() cannot fail.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_rbio(3)|SSL_get_rbio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_rbio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 HISTORY
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set0_rbio() and SSL_set0_wbio() were added in OpenSSL 1.1.0.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_connect_state, SSL_get_accept_state - prepare SSL object to work in client or server mode
|
||||
SSL_set_connect_state, SSL_set_accept_state - prepare SSL object to work in client or server mode
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -20,22 +22,22 @@ SSL_set_accept_state() sets B<ssl> to work in server mode.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
When the SSL_CTX object was created with L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
When the SSL_CTX object was created with L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
it was either assigned a dedicated client method, a dedicated server
|
||||
method, or a generic method, that can be used for both client and
|
||||
server connections. (The method might have been changed with
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)|SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)> or
|
||||
SSL_set_ssl_method(3).)
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)> or
|
||||
SSL_set_ssl_method().)
|
||||
|
||||
When beginning a new handshake, the SSL engine must know whether it must
|
||||
call the connect (client) or accept (server) routines. Even though it may
|
||||
be clear from the method chosen, whether client or server mode was
|
||||
requested, the handshake routines must be explicitly set.
|
||||
|
||||
When using the L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)> routines, the correct handshake
|
||||
When using the L<SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)> routines, the correct handshake
|
||||
routines are automatically set. When performing a transparent negotiation
|
||||
using L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)> or L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>, the
|
||||
using L<SSL_write(3)> or L<SSL_read(3)>, the
|
||||
handshake routines must be explicitly set in advance using either
|
||||
SSL_set_connect_state() or SSL_set_accept_state().
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -46,10 +48,19 @@ information.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)|SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_write(3)|SSL_write(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)|SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)|SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_new(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
LL<SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_write(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_do_handshake(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_ssl_version(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_fd - connect the SSL object with a file descriptor
|
||||
SSL_set_fd, SSL_set_rfd, SSL_set_wfd - connect the SSL object with a file descriptor
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -47,8 +49,17 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_fd(3)|SSL_get_fd(3)>, L<SSL_set_bio(3)|SSL_set_bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_fd(3)>, L<SSL_set_bio(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)>, L<ssl(3)> , L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_session - set a TLS/SSL session to be used during TLS/SSL connect
|
||||
@@ -17,11 +19,15 @@ is to be established. SSL_set_session() is only useful for TLS/SSL clients.
|
||||
When the session is set, the reference count of B<session> is incremented
|
||||
by 1. If the session is not reused, the reference count is decremented
|
||||
again during SSL_connect(). Whether the session was reused can be queried
|
||||
with the L<SSL_session_reused(3)|SSL_session_reused(3)> call.
|
||||
with the L<SSL_session_reused(3)> call.
|
||||
|
||||
If there is already a session set inside B<ssl> (because it was set with
|
||||
SSL_set_session() before or because the same B<ssl> was already used for
|
||||
a connection), SSL_SESSION_free() will be called for that session.
|
||||
a connection), SSL_SESSION_free() will be called for that session. If that old
|
||||
session is still B<open>, it is considered bad and will be removed from the
|
||||
session cache (if used). A session is considered open, if L<SSL_shutdown(3)> was
|
||||
not called for the connection (or at least L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)> was used to
|
||||
set the SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN state).
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -49,9 +55,18 @@ The operation succeeded.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)|SSL_SESSION_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_session(3)|SSL_get_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)|SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_SESSION_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_session(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_session_reused(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_session_cache_mode(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_shutdown, SSL_get_shutdown - manipulate shutdown state of an SSL connection
|
||||
@@ -44,18 +46,18 @@ SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN and SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN can be set at the same time.
|
||||
|
||||
The shutdown state of the connection is used to determine the state of
|
||||
the ssl session. If the session is still open, when
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)> or L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)> is called,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)> or L<SSL_free(3)> is called,
|
||||
it is considered bad and removed according to RFC2246.
|
||||
The actual condition for a correctly closed session is SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN
|
||||
(according to the TLS RFC, it is acceptable to only send the "close notify"
|
||||
alert but to not wait for the peer's answer, when the underlying connection
|
||||
is closed).
|
||||
SSL_set_shutdown() can be used to set this state without sending a
|
||||
close alert to the peer (see L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>).
|
||||
close alert to the peer (see L<SSL_shutdown(3)>).
|
||||
|
||||
If a "close notify" was received, SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN will be set,
|
||||
for setting SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN the application must however still call
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)> or SSL_set_shutdown() itself.
|
||||
L<SSL_shutdown(3)> or SSL_set_shutdown() itself.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -65,8 +67,17 @@ SSL_get_shutdown() returns the current setting.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_shutdown(3)|SSL_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)|SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_set_verify_result - override result of peer certificate verification
|
||||
@@ -23,7 +25,7 @@ the verification result of the B<ssl> object. It does not become part of the
|
||||
established session, so if the session is to be reused later, the original
|
||||
value will reappear.
|
||||
|
||||
The valid codes for B<verify_result> are documented in L<verify(1)|verify(1)>.
|
||||
The valid codes for B<verify_result> are documented in L<verify(1)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -31,8 +33,17 @@ SSL_set_verify_result() does not provide a return value.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)|SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)|SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<verify(1)|verify(1)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_get_verify_result(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_get_peer_certificate(3)>,
|
||||
L<verify(1)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_shutdown - shut down a TLS/SSL connection
|
||||
@@ -12,7 +14,7 @@ SSL_shutdown - shut down a TLS/SSL connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_shutdown() shuts down an active TLS/SSL connection. It sends the
|
||||
SSL_shutdown() shuts down an active TLS/SSL connection. It sends the
|
||||
"close notify" shutdown alert to the peer.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
@@ -50,21 +52,19 @@ with 1.
|
||||
|
||||
=item If the peer already sent the "close notify" alert B<and> it was
|
||||
already processed implicitly inside another function
|
||||
(L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>), the SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN flag is set.
|
||||
(L<SSL_read(3)>), the SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN flag is set.
|
||||
SSL_shutdown() will send the "close notify" alert, set the SSL_SENT_SHUTDOWN
|
||||
flag and will immediately return with 1.
|
||||
Whether SSL_RECEIVED_SHUTDOWN is already set can be checked using the
|
||||
SSL_get_shutdown() (see also L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)> call.
|
||||
SSL_get_shutdown() (see also L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)> call.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
It is therefore recommended, to check the return value of SSL_shutdown()
|
||||
and call SSL_shutdown() again, if the bidirectional shutdown is not yet
|
||||
complete (return value of the first call is 0). As the shutdown is not
|
||||
specially handled in the SSLv2 protocol, SSL_shutdown() will succeed on
|
||||
the first call.
|
||||
complete (return value of the first call is 0).
|
||||
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_shutdown() additionally depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
The behaviour of SSL_shutdown() additionally depends on the underlying BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_shutdown() will only return once the
|
||||
handshake step has been finished or an error occurred.
|
||||
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_shutdown() can be modified to only set the connection to "shutdown"
|
||||
state but not actually send the "close notify" alert messages,
|
||||
see L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)|SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>.
|
||||
see L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>.
|
||||
When "quiet shutdown" is enabled, SSL_shutdown() will always succeed
|
||||
and return 1.
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ The following return values can occur:
|
||||
|
||||
The shutdown is not yet finished. Call SSL_shutdown() for a second time,
|
||||
if a bidirectional shutdown shall be performed.
|
||||
The output of L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> may be misleading, as an
|
||||
The output of L<SSL_get_error(3)> may be misleading, as an
|
||||
erroneous SSL_ERROR_SYSCALL may be flagged even though no error occurred.
|
||||
|
||||
=item Z<>1
|
||||
@@ -109,17 +109,26 @@ and the peer's "close notify" alert was received.
|
||||
The shutdown was not successful because a fatal error occurred either
|
||||
at the protocol level or a connection failure occurred. It can also occur if
|
||||
action is need to continue the operation for non-blocking BIOs.
|
||||
Call L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> with the return value B<ret>
|
||||
Call L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the return value B<ret>
|
||||
to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)|SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)|SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)|SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)|SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_connect(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)>, L<SSL_set_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_quiet_shutdown(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_clear(3)>, L<SSL_free(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_state_string, SSL_state_string_long - get textual description of state of an SSL object
|
||||
@@ -40,6 +42,15 @@ Detailed description of possible states to be included later.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)|SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_set_info_callback(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_want, SSL_want_nothing, SSL_want_read, SSL_want_write, SSL_want_x509_lookup - obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O operation
|
||||
SSL_want, SSL_want_nothing, SSL_want_read, SSL_want_write, SSL_want_x509_lookup,
|
||||
SSL_want_async, SSL_want_async_job - obtain state information TLS/SSL I/O
|
||||
operation
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -13,6 +17,8 @@ SSL_want, SSL_want_nothing, SSL_want_read, SSL_want_write, SSL_want_x509_lookup
|
||||
int SSL_want_read(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
int SSL_want_write(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
int SSL_want_x509_lookup(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
int SSL_want_async(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
int SSL_want_async_job(const SSL *ssl);
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 DESCRIPTION
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -24,15 +30,15 @@ by SSL_want().
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_want() examines the internal state information of the SSL object. Its
|
||||
return values are similar to that of L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
Unlike L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, which also evaluates the
|
||||
return values are similar to that of L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
Unlike L<SSL_get_error(3)>, which also evaluates the
|
||||
error queue, the results are obtained by examining an internal state flag
|
||||
only. The information must therefore only be used for normal operation under
|
||||
non-blocking I/O. Error conditions are not handled and must be treated
|
||||
using L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
using L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
The result returned by SSL_want() should always be consistent with
|
||||
the result of L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
the result of L<SSL_get_error(3)>.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 RETURN VALUES
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -48,30 +54,52 @@ There is no data to be written or to be read.
|
||||
|
||||
There are data in the SSL buffer that must be written to the underlying
|
||||
B<BIO> layer in order to complete the actual SSL_*() operation.
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_READING
|
||||
|
||||
More data must be read from the underlying B<BIO> layer in order to
|
||||
complete the actual SSL_*() operation.
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_X509_LOOKUP
|
||||
|
||||
The operation did not complete because an application callback set by
|
||||
SSL_CTX_set_client_cert_cb() has asked to be called again.
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_X509_LOOKUP.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_ASYNC_PAUSED
|
||||
|
||||
An asynchronous operation partially completed and was then paused. See
|
||||
L<SSL_get_all_async_fds(3)>. A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)> should return
|
||||
SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC.
|
||||
|
||||
=item SSL_ASYNC_NO_JOBS
|
||||
|
||||
The asynchronous job could not be started because there were no async jobs
|
||||
available in the pool (see ASYNC_init_thread(3)). A call to L<SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
should return SSL_ERROR_WANT_ASYNC_JOB.
|
||||
|
||||
=back
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_want_nothing(), SSL_want_read(), SSL_want_write(), SSL_want_x509_lookup()
|
||||
return 1, when the corresponding condition is true or 0 otherwise.
|
||||
SSL_want_nothing(), SSL_want_read(), SSL_want_write(), SSL_want_x509_lookup(),
|
||||
SSL_want_async() and SSL_want_async_job() return 1, when the corresponding
|
||||
condition is true or 0 otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<err(3)|err(3)>, L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<err(3)>, L<SSL_get_error(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2001-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
|
||||
=pod
|
||||
|
||||
=encoding utf8
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 NAME
|
||||
|
||||
SSL_write - write bytes to a TLS/SSL connection.
|
||||
SSL_write - write bytes to a TLS/SSL connection
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SYNOPSIS
|
||||
|
||||
@@ -18,27 +20,27 @@ B<ssl> connection.
|
||||
=head1 NOTES
|
||||
|
||||
If necessary, SSL_write() will negotiate a TLS/SSL session, if
|
||||
not already explicitly performed by L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>. If the
|
||||
not already explicitly performed by L<SSL_connect(3)> or
|
||||
L<SSL_accept(3)>. If the
|
||||
peer requests a re-negotiation, it will be performed transparently during
|
||||
the SSL_write() operation. The behaviour of SSL_write() depends on the
|
||||
underlying BIO.
|
||||
underlying BIO.
|
||||
|
||||
For the transparent negotiation to succeed, the B<ssl> must have been
|
||||
initialized to client or server mode. This is being done by calling
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or SSL_set_accept_state()
|
||||
before the first call to an L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)> or SSL_write() function.
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)> or SSL_set_accept_state()
|
||||
before the first call to an L<SSL_read(3)> or SSL_write() function.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<blocking>, SSL_write() will only return, once the
|
||||
write operation has been finished or an error occurred, except when a
|
||||
renegotiation take place, in which case a SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ may occur.
|
||||
renegotiation take place, in which case a SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ may occur.
|
||||
This behaviour can be controlled with the SSL_MODE_AUTO_RETRY flag of the
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> call.
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)> call.
|
||||
|
||||
If the underlying BIO is B<non-blocking>, SSL_write() will also return,
|
||||
when the underlying BIO could not satisfy the needs of SSL_write()
|
||||
to continue the operation. In this case a call to
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)> with the
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)> with the
|
||||
return value of SSL_write() will yield B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_READ> or
|
||||
B<SSL_ERROR_WANT_WRITE>. As at any time a re-negotiation is possible, a
|
||||
call to SSL_write() can also cause read operations! The calling process
|
||||
@@ -51,7 +53,7 @@ must be written into or retrieved out of the BIO before being able to continue.
|
||||
SSL_write() will only return with success, when the complete contents
|
||||
of B<buf> of length B<num> has been written. This default behaviour
|
||||
can be changed with the SSL_MODE_ENABLE_PARTIAL_WRITE option of
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>. When this flag is set,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>. When this flag is set,
|
||||
SSL_write() will also return with success, when a partial write has been
|
||||
successfully completed. In this case the SSL_write() operation is considered
|
||||
completed. The bytes are sent and a new SSL_write() operation with a new
|
||||
@@ -85,10 +87,6 @@ The write operation was not successful, because either the connection was
|
||||
closed, an error occurred or action must be taken by the calling process.
|
||||
Call SSL_get_error() with the return value B<ret> to find out the reason.
|
||||
|
||||
SSLv2 (deprecated) does not support a shutdown alert protocol, so it can
|
||||
only be detected, whether the underlying connection was closed. It cannot
|
||||
be checked, why the closure happened.
|
||||
|
||||
Old documentation indicated a difference between 0 and -1, and that -1 was
|
||||
retryable.
|
||||
You should instead call SSL_get_error() to find out if it's retryable.
|
||||
@@ -97,10 +95,19 @@ You should instead call SSL_get_error() to find out if it's retryable.
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 SEE ALSO
|
||||
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)|SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)|SSL_read(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)|SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)|SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)|SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)|SSL_accept(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)|SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)|ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)|bio(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_get_error(3)>, L<SSL_read(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_CTX_set_mode(3)>, L<SSL_CTX_new(3)>,
|
||||
L<SSL_connect(3)>, L<SSL_accept(3)>
|
||||
L<SSL_set_connect_state(3)>,
|
||||
L<ssl(3)>, L<bio(3)>
|
||||
|
||||
=head1 COPYRIGHT
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright 2000-2016 The OpenSSL Project Authors. All Rights Reserved.
|
||||
|
||||
Licensed under the OpenSSL license (the "License"). You may not use
|
||||
this file except in compliance with the License. You can obtain a copy
|
||||
in the file LICENSE in the source distribution or at
|
||||
L<https://www.openssl.org/source/license.html>.
|
||||
|
||||
=cut
|
||||
|
||||
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Reference in New Issue
Block a user